manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon NP6251, Service Manual

The Canon NP6251 Service Manual is a comprehensive guide that allows users to troubleshoot and repair their Canon NP6251 printer. This manual is available for free download on manualshive.com, providing users with easy access to the essential information needed to maintain and maximize the performance of their device.

Share
Download
background image

2-3) If the user does not want control by group, set the DIP switch (SW5-4) to OFF.

If you are connecting a Copy Data Interface Board-B1, Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1,
or Copy Data Interface Board-A1, see A. “Setting the Board” in the appropriate
Installation Procedure.

Fig. 9-502

3) Set the jumper connectors (JA1, JA2, JB1, JB2) on the Copy Data Controller-A1

according to the specifications of the user.

Fig. 9-503

a. If you are connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data Interface

Board-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is necessary,

Fig. 9-504

JB1

JB2

1

6

SW4

SW1 ON

SW5 ON

LED6

LED5

LED4

LED3

LED2

LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EPROM

SRAM

CPU

IPC

JC9

JC6

JC5

JC8

J5

JB1

JB2

JA2

JA1

1

6

1

6

SW4

SW1 ON

SW5 ON

LED6

LED5

LED4

LED3

LED2

LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EPROM

SRAM

CPU

IPC

JC9

JC6

JC5

JC8

J5

1

6

SW1

1

6

1

6

SW5

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.                CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9  INSTALLATION

9-42

Summary of Contents for NP6251

Page 1: ...SERVICE MANUAL REVISION 0 FY8 13F0 000 JULY 1997 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON ...

Page 2: ...PARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS AND MAY CONTAIN INFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC Printed in Japan Imprimé au Japon Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information Prepared by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SU...

Page 3: ...ins the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation It also shows how these units may be disassembled assembled and adjusted Chapter 6 Fixing System explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer media in view of the functions of electrical and m...

Page 4: ...circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors...

Page 5: ...l Card V It feeds a stack of originals to the copier sheet by sheet It allows control of copy volume It can automatically sort and group copies It can accommodate as many as 3 500 sheets of A4 B5 LTR paper In addition to the functions of the 20 Bin Stapler Sorter it can automatically staple sorted copies It also is equipped with a front access function in which copies may be removed from the front...

Page 6: ...1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON iv ...

Page 7: ... Separation Mode 2 9 D Main Motor M1 Control Circuitry 2 11 1 Outline 2 11 2 Operation 2 12 3 Detecting an Error 2 12 E Inputs to the DC Controller 2 13 F Outputs from the DC Controller 2 21 G Inputs to and Outputs from Accessories 2 32 CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM I OUTLINE OF OPERATION 3 1 A Varying the Reproduction Ratio 3 1 II LENS DRIVE SYSTEM 3 2 A Moving of the Lens 3 2 1 Outline of the Moveme...

Page 8: ...rase Mode 4 21 8 Controlling the Activation in AE Mode 4 21 F Drum Heater Circuit 4 22 1 Outline 4 22 2 Idle Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum and the Developing Cylinder 4 24 G Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire 4 25 1 Outline 4 25 2 Automatic Cleaning Mechanism 4 25 H Pre Transfer Transfer Separation Charging Wire Automatic Cleaning Mechanism 4 26 II DRUM CLEANING ASSEMBLY DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ...

Page 9: ...eveloping Assembly from the Copier 4 60 2 Removing the Blade Unit 4 61 3 Installing the Blade 4 61 4 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Magnetic Seal 4 62 5 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Anti Stray Sheet 4 65 L Hopper Assembly 4 66 1 Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Copier 4 66 M Drum Cleaner 4 67 1 Construction 4 67 2 Removing the Cleaning Blade 4 67 3 Installing the Cleaning Blade ...

Page 10: ... 6 Pick Up Vertical Path Feeding 2 through 4 Stationary Jam 5 51 7 Fixing Assembly Outlet Delay Jam 5 52 8 Fixing Assembly Outlet Stationary Jam 5 52 9 External Delivery Delay Jam 5 53 10 External Delivery Stationary Jam 5 53 11 Internal Delivery Delay Jam 5 54 12 Internal Delivery Stationary Jam 5 54 13 Holding Tray Inlet Delay Jam 5 55 14 Holding Tray Inlet Stationary Jam 5 55 15 Holding Tray Re...

Page 11: ... from the Copier 5 102 3 Removing the Holding Tray Re Pick Up Assembly 5 102 4 Removing the Holding Tray Registration Paper Sensor 5 103 5 Removing the Re Pick Up Roller 5 104 6 Removing the Holding Tray Driver PCB 5 104 7 Removing the Holding Tray Y Motor 5 105 8 Removing the Y Motor Home Position Sensor 5 107 9 Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly 5 107 10 Removing the Feeding Roller Separat...

Page 12: ...per Separation Claw 6 11 F SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater 6 12 G Locking Operation fixing feeding unit 6 14 H Error Detection Circuit 6 15 1 Outline 6 15 2 Scanning Lamp Error Activation Detection Circuit 6 15 3 Fixing Heater Error Activation Detection Circuit 6 16 4 Motor Error Rotation Detection Circuit 6 17 II DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 6 18 A Fixing Assembly 6 19 1 Constructio...

Page 13: ...let Assembly 7 54 I SIDE PAPER DECK 8 1 A Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver 8 1 1 Inputs to the Side Deck Driver 1 2 8 1 2 Inputs to the Side Deck Driver 2 2 8 2 3 Outputs from the Side Deck Driver 1 1 8 3 B Pick Up 8 4 1 Outline 8 4 2 Pick Up Operation 8 4 3 Sequence of Operations deck pick up 8 6 C Detection of Paper for the Deck 8 7 1 Detecting the Presence Absence of Paper 8 7 2 ...

Page 14: ...iver PCB 8 49 2 Removing the OPEN Switch PCB 8 49 I SELECTING THE SITE 9 1 II UNPACKING AND INSTALLING 9 4 A Unpacking 9 5 B Installing the Scanner 9 7 C Installing the Fixing Assembly 9 8 D Installing the AP Kit and the Charging Assemblies 9 10 E Installing the Copy Tray 9 16 1 Replacing the Delivery Gear 9 16 2 Replacing the Delivery Roller Leaf Spring 9 17 F Checking the Developing Assembly 9 1...

Page 15: ... Wire 11 19 3 Adjusting the Position of the Blanking Exposure Lamp 11 20 4 Position of the Roller Electrode 11 21 5 Adjusting the Position of the Cleaning Assembly Side Seal 11 21 6 Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper 11 22 D Pick Up Feeding System 11 24 1 Orientation of the Cassette Front Paper Deck Pick Up Roller 11 24 2 Orientation of the Cassette Front Paper Deck Separation Roller 11 25 3 Orient...

Page 16: ...hers 11 65 B Sample Image Faults 11 68 C Troubleshooting Image Faults 11 69 1 The copy is too light halftone only 11 69 2 The copy is too light including solid black 11 70 3 The copy is too light entire face 11 70 4 The copy has an uneven density darker at front 11 72 5 The copy has an uneven density lighter at front 11 72 6 The copy is foggy overall 11 73 7 The copy has vertical fogging 11 74 8 T...

Page 17: ...Paper message fails to turn off 11 115 54 The fixing heater fails to operate 11 116 55 Pick up fails paper deck A1 11 117 56 The deck lifter fails to move up paper deck A1 11 118 V TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS 11 119 A Copy Paper Jams 11 119 1 Pick Up Assembly 11 120 2 Separation Feeding Assembly 11 121 3 Fixing Delivery Assembly 11 122 4 Fixing Delivery Assembly reversed delivery 11 122 5 Cle...

Page 18: ...LS AND ABBREVIATIONS A 3 1 Signals A 3 2 Abbreviations A 4 C GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 5 not available D PAPER DECK A1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 7 E SPECIAL TOOLS LIST A 9 F SOLVENTS AND OILS A 10 G Function Mode 11 233 H Options Mode 11 244 I Counter Mode 11 253 VIII SELF DIAGNOSIS 11 259 A Copier 11 259 B RDF D1 11 264 C Sorter 11 266 6 5 4 ...

Page 19: ...II NAMES OF PARTS 1 10 A External View 1 10 B Cross Section 1 12 IV OPERATING THE MACHINE 1 13 A Control Panel 1 13 B Extended Modes 1 14 C User Mode 1 15 V ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER 1 19 VI POINTS TO NOTE BY THE USER 1 19 VII IMAGE FORMATION 1 20 A Outline 1 20 This chapter introduces the copier s features and specifications shows how to operate the copier and explains how copies are made ...

Page 20: ...ed copiers The use of Canon s proprietary A Si amorphous silicon photosensitive drum ensures durability while its single component toner projection developing mechanism leads to enhanced image reproduction 4 It comes with a large size liquid crystal display for ease of viewing 5 When fitted with a side paper deck accessory it will hold as many as 7 550 sheets 5 550 sheets if NP6250 COPYRIGHT 1997 ...

Page 21: ...r manual Dry toner projection Multifeeder 5 5 mm deep 50 sheets of 80 g m2 Corona Corona static Blade Heating roller 790 W 410 W 120V 1200W 220 240V COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 2 Body Copyboard Light source Lens Photosensitive medium Console Fixed Halogen lamp 70 V 265 W Zoom Amorphous silicon 80 mm ...

Page 22: ... Enlarge IV Zoom Wait time First copy Continuous copying Copying size Sheet book 3 D object 2 kg max A3 1 1 1 0 500 1 0 707 1 0 816 1 0 865 1 2 000 1 1 414 1 1 224 1 1 154 1 0 490 to 2 040 1 increments 5 min min at 20 C 3 0 sec A4 non AE right deck pick up 999 copies max One sided A A3 max A6 vertical min postcard Inch 279 4 431 mm 11 17 max STMT min Two sided A A3 max A5 horizontal min Inch 279 4...

Page 23: ...red paper Canon recommended A4 Plain paper 64 to 90 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4 B5R 11 17 LGL LTR LTR R STMT R postcard Tracing paper SM 1 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R Transparency Canon recommended A4 LTR Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 Label sheet Canon recommended A4 LTR Thick paper 91 to 200 g m2 Plain paper 64 to 90 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R 11 17 LGL LTR LTR R A5 STMT Colored paper Canon recommended B4 ...

Page 24: ...rox A3 of 80 g m2 For Direct 4 5 1 5 mm for non default overlay two sided 4 5 1 5 mm 2 0 1 5 mm non default overlay two sided 2 0 1 0 mm if with RDF D1 2 0 1 8 mm 2 75 2 5 mm if with RDF D1 2 75 2 75 mm 2 75 2 5 mm if with RDF D1 2 75 2 75 mm Provided 2 min standard may be varied between 0 and 1 hr in 10 min increments may be varied between 1 and 2 hr in 1 hr increments Provided 1 hr standard may ...

Page 25: ...mospheric 810 6 to 1013 3 hPa 0 8 to 1 0 atm pressure Operating environment Power supply Power consumption Noise Dimensions Ozone Weight Consumables Maximum 1 5 kW or less Standby 0 3 kWh approx reference only Copying 71 dB or less sound power level by ISO Standby Satisfies standard of 50 dB or less Width 643mm 25 3 in Depth 725mm 28 5 in Height 1169mm 46 0 in Copy paper Keep wrapped to protect ag...

Page 26: ...0 II 70 III 81 IV 86 I 200 II 141 III 122 IV 115 Copies min 25 50 33 50 39 44 43 36 41 50 38 32 50 24 25 33 46 33 25 50 Copy paper A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R B5R A5R A4R B5R A5 A4R B4 B5 A3 A3 B4 A4 B4 A3 A4 Size A3 297 420mm A4 210 297mm B4 257 364mm B5 182 257mm A4R 297 210mm B5R 257 182mm A3 Õ 5R A3 Õ A4R B4 Õ B5R A4 Õ A5 B4 Õ A4R A3 Õ B4 A4 Õ B5 A5R Õ A3 A4R Õ A3 B5R Õ B4 A5 Õ A4 A4R Õ B4 B4 Õ A3 B5 Õ A4...

Page 27: ...PAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 8 Ratio Direct Reduce Enlarge I 50 II 64 7 III 73 3 I 200 II 129 4 III 121 4 Copies min 50 25 34 41 50 43 38 39 24 25 25 Copy paper LTR 11 17 LGL LTRR STMT STMTR STMTR LTRR LTRR 11 17 11 17 11 17 Size LTR 11 17 LGL LTRR STMT STMTR 11 17 Õ STMTR 11 17 Õ LTRR 11 15 Õ LTRR STMR Õ 11 17 LTRR Õ 11 17 LGL Õ 11 17 ...

Page 28: ...ume Serial number Paper size alteration Dimensions Weight Power supply Operating environment Temperature Humidity Specifications Clawless retard Side tray Plain paper 64 to 90 g m2 A4 B5 LTR Colored paper Canon recommended A4 385 mm high stack about 3 500 sheets of 80 g m2 paper ZHY XXXXX A B ZHZ XXXXX Inch By size guide plate in steps in service mode 5 329 W 583 D 680 H mm 13 0 W 23 0 D 26 8 H in...

Page 29: ...1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 10 III NAMES OF PARTS A External View Figure 1 301 q r u i o 0 1 2 3 w e t y q Copy tray w RDF e Toner supply mouth r Original tray Instructions tray t Power switch y Multifeeder u Upper right door i Lower right door o Cassette 4 0 Cassette 3 1 Right deck 2 Left deck 3 Front door ...

Page 30: ...ME AU JAPON CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 11 Figure 1 302 8 9 0 1 4 5 7 6 4 Fixing assembly knob 5 Fixing feeding assembly 6 Fixing feeding assembly lever 7 Toner hopper 8 Holding tray feeding assembly knob 9 Holding tray feeding assembly 0 Holding tray assembly 1 Holding tray knob ...

Page 31: ...mirror y Fixing assembly u Copyboard glass i Fixing web o Lens 0 Drum cleaning assembly 1 Pre exposure lamp 2 Primary charging assembly 3 Potential sensor 4 No 6 mirror 5 Blanking exposure lamp 6 Developing cylinder 7 No 4 mirror 8 No 5 mirror 9 Multifeeder pick up roller 0 Roller electrode 1 Pre transfer corona assembly 2 Registration roller 3 Transfer separation 4 Feeding belt 5 Duplexing feedin...

Page 32: ...GHT DARK PAPERSELECT FIT IMAGE ZOOM SORTER 2 SIDED SPECIALFEATURES A 4 Pre Heat key Image contrast key Reset key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 C C Guide key User mode key Interrupt key Start key Stop key C q w r t y u i e o 0 1 2 3 q Touch panel display w Guide key e Reset key r Numeric keypad t Image contrast key y Pre Heat key u Stop key i Toner supply mouth o Pilot lamp 0 Start key 1 Clear key 2 Inter...

Page 33: ...nding Use it to select original frame erasing sheet frame erasing hole image erasing or book frame erasing Use it to select one sided original to two sided copy two sided original to two sided copy or two sided original to one sided copy Use it to make overlay copies Use it for automatic selection of copy paper best suited to original size and copy size Use it for automatic selection of reproducti...

Page 34: ...ying to avoid wrong orientation of mirror originals holes on odd even numbered pages ON Enable skip copy OFF Disable skip copy Use it to enable or disable auto start when the RDF is used for manual feeding whether copying should start immediately after pulling in an original or after a press on the Copy Start key ON Enable auto start OFF Disable auto start Use it to enable or disable auto cassette...

Page 35: ...r OFF Disable the buzzer Use it to select the reproduction ratio for the just fit function between 90 and 99 in 1 increments Use it to enable or disable centering in just fit mode ON Enable centering OFF Disable centering Use it to enable or disable non imaging in just fit mode ON Enable non imaging OFF Disable non imaging Use it to select a power saving rate in pre heat mode 10 at 10 25 at 25 50 ...

Page 36: ...ntal reproduction ratios in 0 2 increments Width 1 0 to 1 0 Unit 0 2 Remarks Item Auto Clear Time Auto Power Off Time Weekly Timer Time Day Description Use it to set the auto clear time between 1 and 9 min in 1 min increments or between 0 and 50 sec in 10 sec increments Set it to 0 sec to disable the auto clear function Use it to set the auto power off time between 10 min and 2 hr in 10 min increm...

Page 37: ...NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 18 4 Preferences Table 1 405 Item User Customize Description Use it to assign specific modes to keys on the Standard screen Remarks 2 max ...

Page 38: ...he following at least once a week 1 Copyboard Glass Wipe it with a moist cloth then dry wipe it 2 RDF Feeding Belt Wipe it with a cloth moistened with a solution of mild detergent then dry wipe it VI POINTS TO NOTE BY THE USER Handling the Toner Bottle Instruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflammable material Do NOT throw the cartridges into fire it can burst or explode Cauti...

Page 39: ...he mechanisms shown the machine is equipped with an automatic control function to control the potential of the drum surface Figure 1 601 Copyboard glass Scanning lamp Lens Fixing assembly Cleaning assembly Pre exposure LED lamp Primary charging assembly Blanking exposure LED lamp Developing assembly Roller electrode Pre transfer charging assembly Pick up multifeeder Pick up cassette re pick up Tra...

Page 40: ...paration AC positive DC Step 8 Fixing Step 9 Drum cleaning Figure 1 602 2 Primary charging 1 Pre exposure 4 Development Delivery 8 Fixing 7 Separation 9 Drum cleaning 3 Image exposure Flow of copy paper Rotation of drum Multifeeder 6 Transfer Pick up Registration Static latent image formation block 5 Pre transfer charging COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPA...

Page 41: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 22 ...

Page 42: ... 1 B Outline of the Electrical Circuitry 2 2 C Basic Sequence of Operations 2 4 D Main Motor M1 Control Circuitry 2 11 E Inputs to the DC Controller 2 13 F Outputs from the DC Controller 2 21 G Inputs to and Outputs from Accessories 2 32 This chapter provides outlines of the copier s various mechanical workings Note that a single rotation of the drum takes about 0 79 sec ...

Page 43: ...leaning assembly Toner collecting assembly Feeding assembly Pick up control assembly Multifeeder Holding tray inlet assembly Cassette paper deck Pick up feeding assembly Delivery control assembly Exposure system Holding tray Holding tray feeding assembly Control panel Image formation system Copy tray Control circuitry Fixing assembly Separation Transfer Optical assembly COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CA...

Page 44: ...al Ambient temperature signal Manual feed size signal The machine s control panel is equipped with a dedicated CPU Q937 which controls the keys LEDs and LCD on the control panel The machine communicates with the RDF and the sorter using the communications IC on its DC controller PCB and the communications IC IPC on the controller PCB of each accessory IPC communication 2 Figure 2 102 is a block di...

Page 45: ...er electrode LED Lens motor Solenoid Clutch Heaters Main motor Scanner motor Motor driver PCB AC driver PCB Sensors switches Control panel CPU Q156 CPU Q160 Q161 ROM Q136 Q137 Q138 Q162 RAM Q2001 Loads Control Sensors DC controller PCB Q158 IPC Side deck driver PCB Sensors switches Side paper deck Potential sensor Potential measurement circuit COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JUL...

Page 46: ... Blanking exposure LED 00 Fixing main heater H1 Surface potential control timing Scanning lamp LA1 1 1 VD VL1 VL2 2 1 WMUP 195 C CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY About 10 sec after end of CNTR2 Controlled to 200 C 3 1 During potential control CNTR1 CNTR2 VD and VL1 are measured therefore blanking exposure lamp LEDs corresponding to the potential sensor are turned OFF 2 If the surface temperature of the fixin...

Page 47: ...sure LED Fixing main heater H1 Surface potential control Scanning lamp LA1 VD VL1 VL2 WMUP 195 C 200 C CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY 200 C 205 C WMUPR Controlled to 200 C 210 C Differences from Sequence 1 2 WMUPR is executed until the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 C 210 C without ending LSTR in 10 sec after potential control CNTR1 CNTR2 The surface temperature of the fixing roller i...

Page 48: ... key is pressed or the power switch is turned off Function Waits until the fixing assembly warms up Evens out the sur face temperature of the fixing roller Discharges copy paper if any Measures the drum surface potential VD Measures the drum surface potential VL Rids the surface of static charges as post treatment Waits for a press on the Copy Start key or an operation key Remarks If the temperatu...

Page 49: ...Separation charging assembly AC Pre exposure LED Blanking exposure LED Scanning lamp LA1 Main motor M1 Developing clutch CL1 Scanner motor M3 STBY INTR CNTR1 AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY CNTR2 1 Forward Reverse 1 Turns off the blanking exposure LEDs corresponding to the potential sensor for potential measurement VD VL1 VL2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED I...

Page 50: ...n tial control the scanner motor is rotated in reverse to return the scanner to home posi tion without fail Determines the value of the developing bias DC component for copying according to the measurement of VL2 Executed only in AE mode The registration signal is generated to move the copy paper to the transfer assembly The pick up signal is generated to pick up the second sheet Discharges the la...

Page 51: ...leading edge of the original the originals on both left and right sides on the copyboard are copied based on the resulting measurements Reference If the conditions for potential control given on p 4 1 are met potential control rotation CNTR1 2 is executed after INTR Figure 2 106 Copy Start key ON Transfer charging assembly Separation charging assembly Blanking exposure LED lamp Scanner Primary cha...

Page 52: ... generated to pick up the next sheet The registration signal is generated so that the leading edge of the image of the original on the right matches the copy paper with reference to the SCDP signal Function Illuminates the original on the left on the copy board with the scanning lamp and the reflected optical image is project ed on the photosensi tive drum through mirrors and lenses Returns the sc...

Page 53: ... these clock pulses to ensure that the motor rotates at a specific speed at all times These clock pulses are also sent to the DC controller PCB after its frequency is divided to 1 4 Figure 2 107 DC controller PCB Q156 Master Main motor control PCB Main motor Rotor Hall IC V W Motor driver circuit MMCLK Frequency comparison signal Phase comparison signal Mixing Switch circuit Phase comparison Frequ...

Page 54: ...n circuit generates control signals phase comparison signals so that the phase of the clock pulses MMCLK from the main motor matches that of the reference signals Likewise the frequency comparison circuit generates control signals frequency comparison signals so that the frequency of the clock pulses MMCLK from the main motor matches that of the reference pulses After both phase comparison signal ...

Page 55: ...ate is at PS7 When the lens is at X home position 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS6 When the copyboard cover RDF is closed 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS5 When the scanning lamp is at image leading edge 2 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS4 When the scanning lamp is at image leading edge 1 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS3 When the scanner is at home position 1 When...

Page 56: ...up sensor Holding tray re circulating lever home position sensor J2747 1 2 3 J2755 32 33 34 J108B 8 7 6 Holding tray control PCB When PS10 has detected paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS10 When the fixing cleaning belt is shorter than the specified length 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS11 When PS12 has detected copy paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS12 When copy pa...

Page 57: ...14 1 2 3 J812 5 4 3 J130A 5 4 3 J815 1 2 3 8 7 6 J130A 8 7 6 Holding tray control PCB DC controller PCB When the side guide is at PS20 1 When the side guide is at both ends When the rear partition is at PS21 1 When the rear partition is at the rear end When paper is present at multifeeder 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS22 When PS23 has detected paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at ...

Page 58: ...ion sensor Left deck paper sensor Pick up vertical path 2 sensor Right deck open closed sensor Left deck limiter sensor Right deck limiter sensor DC controller PCB When PS30 has detected copy paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS30 When PS31 has detected the lifter 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS31 When PS32 has detected paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at PS32 When PS33 ...

Page 59: ...n closed sensor Claw jam sensor Fixing feeding unit sensor Potential measurement sensor DC controller PCB When the left deck is open 0 When the light blocking plate is at PS40 When the right door upper is open 0 When the light blocking plate is at PS41 When the right door lower is open 0 When the light blocking plate is at PS42 When the door of the multifeeder is closed 1 When the light blocking p...

Page 60: ...ries according to the size of the original Varies according to the size of the original Varies according to the size of the original When the service switch is pressed 0 When the waste toner feeding screw is locked 0 E013 is indicated When 24 VU is supplied 1 Front door switch Original size detection 1 Original size detection 2 Original size detection 3 Service switch Waste toner feeding screw loc...

Page 61: ...4 paper width detection Hopper toner sensor Developing assembly toner level detection Holding tray unit detection DC controller PCB Varies according to the size of copy paper Varies according to the size of copy paper Varies according to the size of copy paper When the level of toner drops below a specific level 0 When the level of toner drops below a specific level 0 When the holding tray unit is...

Page 62: ...stor Fixing assembly sub thermistor Environment sensor DC controller PCB Varies according to the length of copy paper Varies according to the length of copy paper When the 4 cassette type is used 0 When the temperature of the fixing roller increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature of the fixing roller increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature insid...

Page 63: ...1 J104A 4 3 7 8 J716 2 1 J5 4 3 J5 1 J5 2 5 6 2 5 6 J6 1 12V 5V 3 3 J302 1 3 J301 1 J301 5 1 2 3 9 8 7 J503 1 2 3 4 5 9 8 7 6 5 J111B J501 4 6 3 1 J2 2 J2 1 J4 2 1 J3 2 1 J7 1 2 J01 5 6 3 1 J1 4 8 2 6 1 2 J641 3 4 8 4 7 6 J642 2 6 3 1 4 5 9 3 J643 1 7 5 Front door switch Drum heater J311 4 5 J102A 6 5 J102B AC driver PCB When 1 the front door is open When 0 the power switch is OFF When the power s...

Page 64: ...0V From power supply unit Scanner motor M2 M2BRK M2FG M2H L M2ON Pick up motor J612 1 3 8 7 6 5 4 2 J114B 10 12 5 6 7 8 9 11 5V 5V 5V 5V M1FG M1ON J611 1 2 38V 0V From power supply unit J601 1 2 38V 0V From power supply unit DC controller PCB J111B 2 3 4 1 J602 12 11 14 13 J733 3 4 5 2 Main motor COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER...

Page 65: ...B M4_B X HOLD While M16 is rotating alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal J110A 12 15 10 11 13 14 M5_A M5_A M5_B M5_B Y HOLD While M17 is rotating alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal J736 J2756 J108A 1 2 1 2 TSCLM1 TSCLM2 Lens X motor When 0 M6 rotates CW forward When 1 M6 rotates CCW reverse COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPT...

Page 66: ...motor is rotating alternates between 1 and 0 While the motor is rotating alternates between 1 and 0 M9 M7ON M8_HLD M8_B M9_A M9_HLD M9_B J755 1 2 4 5 J754 4 5 J2071 4 5 J207 J113A 9 J113A 13 12 11 J209 1 2 3 4 5 6 J208 4 5 6 7 8 9 J208 4 5 6 7 8 9 J113B 2 3 4 When 1 M9 stops When 1 M8 stops J751 1 2 3 4 5 6 J753 1 2 3 4 5 6 Holding tray control PCB Holding tray control PCB COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC...

Page 67: ...r supplying Primary charging wire cleaning motor Pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor Cassette 3 lifter motor Cassette 4 lifter motor Right deck lifter motor Left deck lifter motor DC controller PCB When 0 M10 turns on When 0 M11 turns on When 1 M12 rotates CW forward When 1 M12 rotates CCW reverse When 1 M14 turns on When 1 M15 turns on When 1 M18 turns on When 1 M19 turns on When 1 M13 rota...

Page 68: ...tion at 24 V full speed rotation FM8D FM2 J704 1 2 J117B 12 13 FM3 J710 1 2 J104A 1 2 FM5 J784 1 2 J115A 1 2 FM6 J109 1 2 J109 1 2 FM7 J3774 1 2 J114B 3 4 FM8 J715 2 1 J104A 5 6 From power supply unit 5V 0V J201 1 2 3 4 J842 1 2 J781 2 1 24V 0V Heat exhaust fan Fixing heat exhaust fan Developing fan Feeding fan Cleaner fan Scanner cooling fan Holding tray control PCB COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON...

Page 69: ...1 2 J805 1 2 J117A 1 2 4 3 6 7 4 5 J108A 4 5 J782 1 2 1 2 J788 1 2 J115B 1 2 J767 1 2 6 7 6 7 J113B 8 J766 1 2 8 7 8 7 J113A 7 J768 1 2 4 3 4 3 J113A 6 J765 1 2 10 9 10 9 J113B 7 J871 2 1 J112A 8 9 J870 2 1 J112A 6 7 J112A 1 2 Holding tray feeding 1 clutch Holding tray feeding 2 clutch Holding tray reversing clutch Holding tray forward clutch Holding tray separation clutch Multifeeder pick up clut...

Page 70: ...17 1 2 J816 1 2 24V CL13 J130B 1 2 Right deck pick up clutch When 0 CL14 turns on RDPUCD J794 1 2 J793 1 2 24V CL14 J116A 1 2 Pick up vertical path roller 1 drive clutch When 0 CL15 turns on CL15D J819 1 2 24V CL15 J117A 14 15 Left deck pick up clutch When 0 CL16 turns on LDPUCD J846 1 2 J844 1 2 24V CL16 J121A 4 5 Pick up vertical path roller 0 drive clutch When 0 CL18 turns On CL18D J787 1 2 24V...

Page 71: ...ght deck pick up roller releasing solenoid Left deck pick up roller releasing solenoid Holding tray re pick up roller D cut roller solenoid Holding tray weight solenoid Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid Holding tray swinging solenoid SL10 SL1 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL5 SL6 SL7 SL8 SL9 J874 1 2 3 J115B 11 12 13 J2749 2 1 J2755 31 30 J108B 9 10 J2753 2 1 J2755 23 22 J108B 9 10 J866 1 2 J121A 14 15 J...

Page 72: ...C4PURR J823 1 2 24V J130A 9 10 SL12 Fixing feeding unit locking solenoid When 0 SL13 turns on FFULSD J2754 1 2 24V J108B 1 2 SL13 Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid When 0 SL14 turns on FCBSD J2746 1 2 24V J108A 10 11 SL14 When 0 SL16 turns on for normal direction When 1 1 SL16 turns on for reverse direction SL16FD SL16BD Fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid SL16 J108B 16 15 14 J7444 3 2 1 ...

Page 73: ... 7 6 J7181 1 2 Pre exposure LED When 0 the pre exposure LED turns on PEXP J712 1 3 24V J103B 1 2 LED1 J711 1 3 J706 9 5 6 7 8 10 J706 5 1 2 3 4 6 J708 4 8 7 6 5 3 J103A 9 5 6 7 8 10 2 1 J312 1 3 LED2 LED2DT LED2CK LED2LD LED2ON 5V 5V 0V Blanking exposure LED See p 4 19 Power supply for lamp 7 8 11 12 To power supply unit COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN...

Page 74: ...0 Control card When 0 CC V turns on When 0 the card is detected CCNTD CCNNT J726 3 1 2 4 5V CC V J106B 3 1 2 4 24VU 0VU 24VA 0VA 38VU To sorter See the Sorter Service Manual See Chapter 8 TXD GND RXD GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 12 9 10 J701 1 2 3 4 J702 2 1 4 3 J703 J102 1 2 3 4 24VU1 0VU 24VA 0VA From power supply unit From power supply unit COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 P...

Page 75: ...3 2 III SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM 3 6 A Scanner Movement 3 6 IV OTHERS 3 20 A Original Size Detection 3 20 V DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 3 23 A Scanner Drive Assembly 3 24 B Lens Drive Assembly 3 32 This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the copier s lens drive unit and scanner drive unit It also explains the timing at which these drive units are operated and shows how they may be dis...

Page 76: ... focal distance and the position of the lens as shown in Figure 3 101 The scanner drive system varies the reproduction ratio in the peripheral direction of the drum by moving the No mirror faster for reduction or slower for enlargement Reference 1 The copier will not move the mirror to suit any reproduction 2 The peripheral speed of the drum is the same as the speed of the movement of the mirror i...

Page 77: ...and the size of the copy paper are identical in Direct mode the lens is not moved in Y vertical direction Figure 3 202 If the size of the original and the size of the paper are different on the other hand or in Reduce Enlarge mode the lens is moved in Y vertical direction so that the image on the copy paper will be correct n Using the RDF Figure 3 202 top view Original small Original large Copy pa...

Page 78: ...led by the four types of motor drive signals from the DC controller PCB M4A M4A M4B M4B The direction of the motor is changed by changing the timing at which these motor drive signals are sent To keep the lens X motor stationary the lens X motor hold signal X HOLD is generated thereby applying brakes in the form of a voltage lower than when rotating the motor Figure 3 203 DC controller PCB Q156 Mi...

Page 79: ...roprocessor slave Q140 remembers the location of the lens in Direct A4 position When a different ratio is selected it immediately applies drive pulses to the lens X motor M4 Y motor M5 to change the position of the lens See period II of Figure 3 204 The lens Y motor M5 starts to rotate to move the lens when the Copy Start key has been pressed and the sizes of the original and the copy paper have b...

Page 80: ... Cam groove Signal plate Y direction Lens X motor M4 Lens X home position sensor PS6 Lens Y home position signal Lens Y motor drive signal Lens X motor drive signal Lens X home position signal Light blocking belt X direction COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 5 ...

Page 81: ...times the speed when the scanner is moving forward regardless of the selected reproduction ratio Figure 3 301 Scanner home position sensor PS1 Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor PS3 Signal plate Scanner original leading edge 2 sensor PS4 Scanner motor DC controller PCB No 1 mirror mount No 2 No 3 mirror mount SCHP SCDP1 SCDP2 Scanner home position signal Original leading edge detection signal ...

Page 82: ...the selected reproduction ratio 2 Relationship between the Scanner Sensors and the Signals Table 3 301 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 7 Sensor Scanner home position sensor PS1 Original leading edge 1 sensor PS3 Scanner leading edge 2 sensor PS4 Signal SCHP SCDP1 SCDP2 Description Indicates that the scanner ...

Page 83: ...3ON Scanner forward signal SCFW Scanner stop signal M3BLK Blanking exposure lamp Scanner home position sensor PS1 Lens drive motor M4 M5 Scanner motor M3 INTR AER SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor PS3 Scanning lamp LA1 STBY 2 Brake 2 Brake Copy Start key ON 1 FD RS 1 Moves the lens according to the selected reproduction ratio and copy size 2 The degree of braking may be ad...

Page 84: ...ult as the center of the original and the scanner moves assuming it to be the leading edge of the 2nd page If page separation is selected without original size detection the control is based on the size of the selected cassette If the forward distance of II in Figure 3 303 is about 220 mm or more the point about 220 mm is assumed as the leading edge of the 2nd page If the 1st and the 2nd pages are...

Page 85: ...rts control based on the size of the original when any of the following modes has been selected Table 3 302 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 10 Mode RDF in use Original frame erase mode Size used Size of original detected by feeder Size of original specified by user ...

Page 86: ...use of stream reading enables omission of the scanner reverse period thereby reducing the sheet to sheet distance and ultimately enabling a copying speed of 60 copies minute A4 LTR Scanner motor M3 Scanner locking solenoid SL1 Scanner home position signal PS1 Image leading signal SCFW SCFW SCRV Original leading edge sensor 1 PS3 Scanning lamp LA1 INTR Copy Start key ON Original leading edge sensor...

Page 87: ...e image leading edge signal to the copier when the leading edge of the 2nd original moves right next to the scanner In response the copier turns on the registration clutch so that the original and the copy paper are matched By this time the 1st original has been picked up and is following the 2nd original rThe 2nd original is illuminated while it is moved over the scanner Then the RDF sends the im...

Page 88: ...eading wImmediately after stream reading the original is stopped on the copyboard glass and the remaining sets of copies are made in normal scanning mode moving scanner Scanner motor M3 Scanner locking solenoid SL1 Scanner home position signal PS1 Image leading signal SCFW SCFW Scanner image leading edge signal 1 PS3 Scanning lamp LA1 INTR Copy Start Scanner image leading edge signal 2 PS4 Belt mo...

Page 89: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 14 ...

Page 90: ... The 1st original is picked up 4 The 2nd original is illuminated while it is moved over the scanner 5 The 2nd original is stopped where stream reading has ended 6 The scanner executes normal scanning to illuminate the remaining number of copies 7 The scanner moves to the center of the copy board and is held in place by the scanner locking solenoid 9 The 1st original is stopped where stream reading...

Page 91: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 16 ...

Page 92: ...Forward When the scanner motor drive control signal M3ON goes 1 and the scanner forward signal M3F R goes 0 the drive circuit turns on so that the scanner motor rotates clockwise thereby moving the scanner forward Figure 3 308 Scanner motor M3 Rotor Hall IC U W SCMCLK V Scanner motor driver PCB DC controller PCB Motor stop circuit Motor drive circuit Motor rotation speed control circuit J632 8 J11...

Page 93: ...pulses SCMCLK from the scanner motor and sends control signals to suit the difference to the motor drive circuit The motor drive circuit turns on and off the power while keeping the voltage the same at short intervals to control the speed of rotation Since the speed of rotation of the scanner motor is varied according to the selected reproduction ratio the reproduction ratio select signal M3MD0 1 ...

Page 94: ...ed control signal Scanner stop signal INTR SCFW SCRV Scanner home position sensor Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor LSTR 2 1 1 Brakes to slow down 2 Brakes to stop COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 19 ...

Page 95: ...cuit consists of an LED which emits light against the original and a phototransistor which checks the light reflected by the original for output to the DC controller Figure 3 401 A4 B5 A4R B5R A3 B5 A4 B5R A4R B4 A3 Phototransistor LED PS5 Copyboard cover open closed sensor Original detection circuit 2 Original detection circuit 3 Original detection signal 3 Original detection signal 2 Original de...

Page 96: ...an original if the output of the detection circuit remains the same while assuming the absence of an original if the output changes This type of detection enables identification of the size of even a black original Reference 1 If the original is thick and as a result the copyboard cover will not fully close after PS5 has turned ON the level of the sensor output will not change regardless of the si...

Page 97: ... 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 22 DS2 Sensor 2 0 0 0 1 1 Sensor 1 0 0 1 0 1 Sensor 0 0 1 1 0 1 Size Inch None LTRR LGR LTR 279 4mm 431 8mm 11 17 DS1 Original detection signal DS3 Sensor 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 DS2 Sensor 2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Sensor 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Sensor 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 Size AB Absent or A5 A5R B5R B5 A4 A4R B4 ...

Page 98: ...One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to protect against static electricity Do not leave it out during assembly work 5 The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity Do not leave them out during assembly work 6 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 7 Before sl...

Page 99: ...ed on the RDF copyboard cover are longer than others 4 Remove the rear upper cover 5 Remove the rear right cover 6 Remove the multifeeder assembly 7 Remove the five mounting screws q and disconnect the two connectors w then remove the RDF rear right mount e Figure 3 501 Figure 3 502 q w e q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXP...

Page 100: ...tor shaft remove the motor while detaching the belt The scanner drive motor assembly is fixed in position at the factory with a jig making sure that the tension of the belt of the motor assembly is as specified When removing the scanner drive motor assembly be sure to mark the edge of the motor assembly in advance y y u i t r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN ...

Page 101: ... to orient the heat absorbing glass whenever replacing the heat absorbing glass White paint rear front Steel ball Wind eight times Fix temporarily 1 3 4 8 5 6 2 7 6 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 26 ...

Page 102: ...ting screws q and remove the scanner locking disc w Figure 3 506 6 Disconnect the three connectors of the potential control PCB and disconnect the connector of the service switch 7 Remove the five mounting screws e and disconnect the connector r then remove the scanner cooling fan t Figure 3 507 r e t w q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPO...

Page 103: ...wo cable fixing screws front from the No 1 mirror mount Figure 3 509 10 Loosen the tension screw i to loosen the scanner cable Figure 3 510 11 Remove the scanner cable i u y COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 28 ...

Page 104: ...rew A so that the reading of the spring gauge is 200 50 g when the scanner cable is pulled about 10 mm at the center Figure 3 511 6 Positioning the Mirror If you have replaced the scanner drive cable be sure to adjust the position of the mirror as follows 1 Move the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 No 3 mirror mount to the left 2 Set the mirror positioning tool front rear FY9 3011 as shown Figure 3 ...

Page 105: ...e of section A of the electrode mount front of the No 1 mirror mount is in section B of the hole in the glass support front If not change the value of BRAKE_SC in service mode so that the line of section A is in section B Figure 3 514 B No 1 mirror mount Electrode mount front Section A left of wall Glass support front Hole 3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN J...

Page 106: ...of the scanner locking solenoid once again so that it is as specified Figure 3 515 Scanner locking solenoid SL1 E ring Standard 8 5 0 5 mm from below clamp to top of solenoid Loosen these two screws to adjust once again COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 31 ...

Page 107: ...ns by hand Further avoid moving without care and be sure to hold the area near the point of engagement with the rail 1 Removing the Lens Y Direction Drive Motor 1 Remove the copyboard glass retainer and remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the left 3 Remove the three mounting screws q and remove the lens hood w Figure 3 516 When installing the lens hood fit the boss of the le...

Page 108: ...tor together with the support t Figure 3 517 5 Disconnect the connector y and remove the two mounting screws u then detach the lens Y direction drive motor i from the support Figure 3 518 u y i t r e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 33 ...

Page 109: ...f the Y direction cable temporarily in place 5 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the light blocking belt retainer w on lens mount Figure 3 519 6 Remove the mounting screw e and remove the light blocking curtain 2 front r together with the holder Fix the light blocking belt mount temporarily in place with tape to the lens stage Figure 3 520 r e w q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 ...

Page 110: ...le removing the slack then turn the bobbing mount e clockwise two to three times so that the boss on the bottom of the bobbin mount is in the hole of the belt mount Set the bobbin and fix it in place with the mounting screw t Figure 3 522 q w e r t t y u COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 35 ...

Page 111: ...the mounting screw w then remove the motor mount e Figure 3 523 3 Remove the two mounting screws r then detach the lens X direction motor t from the motor mount Figure 3 524 r t q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 36 ...

Page 112: ... lowered on its own weight Figure 3 525 6 Routing the Light Blocking Belt q Light blocking belt 1 e Light blocking belt 3 w Light blocking belt 2 r Light blocking belt 4 Figure 3 526 q w e r q w Own weight COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3 37 ...

Page 113: ...e bobbing clockwise and counterclockwise in units of half turns then let it go so that the spring inside the bobbin is freed 4 Turn the bobbin clockwise two to two and a half times and remove the tape and pull out the end of the belt 5 Hook the end of the belt on the lens unit q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SY...

Page 114: ...mary Charging Wire 4 25 H Pre Transfer Transfer Separation Charging Wire Automatic Cleaning Mechanism 4 26 II DRUM CLEANING ASSEMBLY DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY 4 28 A Outline 4 28 B Detecting the Level of Toner and Controlling the Supply Operation 4 30 C Controlling the Developing Bias Roller Electrode 4 32 D Detecting the Waste Toner Feeding Screw locking 4 38 III DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 4 39 A Scannin...

Page 115: ...sociated parts The machine is equipped with a drum surface potential control mechanism to ensure stable latent static images in the presence of these factors Figure 4 101 Pre exposure lamp Photosensitive drum Lamp regulator PCB Potential measurement PCB Scanning lamp Blanking exposure Blade Cleaning blade Transfer charging assembly Separation charging wire Copy paper Cleaning roller Cleaning screw...

Page 116: ...ow how many times the machine measures and corrects potential and when it initiates control Table 4 101 Measurement Correction for Potential Control Table 4 102 Timing of Potential Control COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 2 Correction Measurement VD 8 max 8 max VL1 8 max 8 max VL2 0 1 Mode Text mode Ph...

Page 117: ... after power on is measured by applying a reference activation voltage stored in ROM on the scanning lamp The scanning lamp illuminates the standard white plate and the light reflected by it is directed to the drum The surface potential of the area on the drum exposed to the light is measured by the potential sensor and the measurement is sent to the DC controller PCB The DC controller PCB compare...

Page 118: ...r so that the electrode of the sensor assembly can detect the drum surface potential The measurement signal of the drum surface signal is amplified by the pre amplifier circuit and is sent to the drum surface potential detection circuit The drum surface potential detection circuit converts the AC signal to an AC signal and sends it to the level shift circuit through the 1 300 transformer circuit T...

Page 119: ...ection circuit High voltage generation adjustment circuit 1 3 transformer circuit Level shift circuit Micro processor DC controller PCB Potential measurement PCB Pre amplifier circuit Sensor cover Electrode Chopper 2 5 mm approx COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 5 ...

Page 120: ...ty to suit the setting of the Copy Density key Controls the intensity AE control to suit the density of the original e Checking the activation of the scanning lamp Figure 4 105 Q156 Micro processor master D A converter Q159 Error detection circuit 12V PWOFF J111B 6 J111B 7 J111B 8 CVRON LINT LAON J503 4 J503 2 J503 2 Lamp activation circuit Power switch SW1 Thermal fuse TP2 Scanning lamp J501 1 Ar...

Page 121: ...emains on the activation detection circuit generates the activation detection signal CVRON at all times CVRON is sent to the error detection circuit on the DC controller PCB If the lamp activation signal LAON goes 0 and the scanning lamp turns on because of a short in the activation circuit or the like the DC controller PCB causes PWOFF to go 0 thereby turning off the relay inside the power switch...

Page 122: ...ner for copying Figure 4 107 b AE Mode RFAE on the RDF Side The RDF is equipped with an AE sensor in its original feeding path to measure the density of originals while they are being moved The AE sensor is a reflecting type sensor in which two LEDs illuminate the original and a photodiode measures the reflected light Figure 4 108 AE sensor 1 S7 is used for left pick up while AE sensor 2 S33 is us...

Page 123: ...er than the Test Sheet the intensity will be an equivalent of F5 if it is darker than a newspaper the intensity will be an equivalent of F9 Figure 4 109 Points of Measurement on an Original Figure 4 110 Test Sheet Newspaper Lighter F9 equivalent F5 equivalent Original density Darker Scanning lamp intensity about 100mm 25mm 98mm L1 9 12 14 6 22 2 3 2 1 RDF feeding direction b Right Pick Up RDF feed...

Page 124: ...l control copy density at 5 Optimum exposure adjustment during non potential control copy density at 5 AE slope Adjustment Intensity Copy density 1V 5V Input q w Intensity Copy density 1 5 9 q w Intensity Copy density 1 5 9 q w Remarks q If the setting is increased in service mode the intensity during copying will increase making the copy lighter w If the setting is decreased in service mode the i...

Page 125: ...ontroller used to control the primary corona current is corrected The corrected signal is converted into an analog value HVTPC signal by the D A converter circuit and is sent to the high voltage transformer thereby controlling the primary corona current The primary corona current output is turned on and off by DCON and is controlled by the HVTPC control When HVTPC is 3 to 11 V the primary corona c...

Page 126: ...sembly controlling it to a specific level at all times In photo mode the target value is lowered by about 80 V than the dark area potential VD used in normal copying mode As such potential control is executed while making the first copy in photo mode after power on to control the primary corona current DC controller PCB Q156 Micro processor D A converter Switch circuit Variable width pulse oscilla...

Page 127: ...e high voltage DC remote signal DCON The output level of the transfer current further is controlled by the transfer charging level control signal HVTTC When HVTTC is about 3 V or more and less than 11 V the output of the transfer corona current turns on it turns off when the signal is about 12 V or more a When the Transfer Corona Current Output is OFF HVTTC is about 12 V DCON is 0 Comparator circu...

Page 128: ...ing level control signal HVTTC to the transfer charging assembly If an excess corona current flows from the transfer charging assembly because of changes in the environment or the like the return signal to the comparison circuit will increase and the output will decrease causing the corona current from the transfer charging assembly to decrease and thereby controlling it to a specific level at all...

Page 129: ...e environment on corona charging The AC transformer is controlled to a specific voltage The separation corona current is varied to eliminate the effects of changes in the environment by measuring the surface potential of the drum and in relation to the output of the environment sensor Figure 4 113 DC controller PCB HVT POST AC HVT POST DC Q156 D A converter ROED J114 A 7 DCON J202 4 J114 A 1 J202 ...

Page 130: ...nsfer corona current is turned on and off when all outputs of the HVTAC drive signal HVP POST AC roller electrode rive signal ROED and high voltage DC drive signal DCON generated by the DC controller PCB go 1 Humidity Pre transfer current Temperature C Drum surface potential high Drum surface potential medium Drum surface potential low Separation current COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP625...

Page 131: ...DC component The level of the pre transfer corona current DC component is varied according to the voltage level of HVP POST DC Figure 4 117 330 0 3 11 Voltage level V of HVT POST DC Pre transfer corona current µA 500 100 3 11 Voltage level V of HVSCT Separation corona current µA COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION...

Page 132: ...l not be resumed unless the cause is removed When the corona current applied to the transfer separation charging assembly stops because of an overcurrent separation jams tend to occur frequently Since the control panel will not indicate any message check the relevant mechanisms if separation jams are frequent Output from the DC controller PCB connector of signal name Table 4 104 Combinations of Tr...

Page 133: ... Mode When the original is exposed in Direct mode as many LEDs as suited at both front and rear are turned on to remove the image in the non image area When a default size copy paper is used to make a default size copy or in Direct mode a non image width Table 4 105 is created at both rear and front standard frame erasing The non image width may be set to 0 mm in service mode 4 Controlling the Act...

Page 134: ...edges of the original in book erase mode LEDs are also turned on to prevent adhesion of toner in widths of about 20 mm standard along the middle of the paper The width may be adjusted to 20 10 mm in service mode Figure 4 119 2 mm approx 2 mm approx 20 mm 7 mm approx 7 mm approx 7 mm approx 2 75 mm Feeding direction COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRI...

Page 135: ...face potential of the drum is measured so that the blank exposure LEDs would have to be turned off Since only parts of the photosensitive drum are used to measure the surface potential however those LEDs that are over the area of measurement are turned with the remaining LEDs kept on Figure 4 121 Photosensitive drum Blank exposure lamp LEDs Potential sensor Feeding direction 1 to 20 mm COPYRIGHT 1...

Page 136: ...controller PCB is 1 on the other hand full wave AC power is supplied to the drum heater The relationship between the state of the copier and the state ON OFF of the drum heater circuit of the AC driver is as follows Table 4 106 The temperature of the drum is monitored at all times by a thermistor TH built into the drum heater If the surface temperature of the drum falls below a specific value the ...

Page 137: ...C Power supply Door switch Drum heater TP3 Triac J01 1 Drum heater controller PCB Trigger circuit Comparison circuit Thermistor TH J01 5 6 DC controller PCB Power supply unit COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 23 ...

Page 138: ...controlled in ether of three modes according to the vapor ratio detected by an environment sensor as shown in Table 4 107 Reference The term vapor ratio refers to the amount of vapor g contained in 1 kg of air The control modes shown in Table 4 107 may be adjusted in service mode Table 4 107 Reference The 100V machines are shipped with the drum heater switch SW3 set to ON idle rotation mode ON COP...

Page 139: ...s at power on the primary charging wire cleaner motor M12 rotates clockwise to move the cleaner forward for about 20 sec The cleaner motor then rotates counterclockwise to move the cleaner in reverse for about 16 sec The machine is not equipped with a position sensor The RAM on the DC controller PCB keeps track of the cleaning operations so that cleaning is executed every 2 000 copies In the case ...

Page 140: ...ging wire is executed under the conditions and the periods set for auto cleaning for the primary charging wire Figure 4 124 pre transfer charging assembly rear front Wire cleaner Wire Pre transfer charging wire Feeding screw Pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor M13 DC controller PCB Pre transfer charging cleaner motor drive command PTRCLM J103A 9 10 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP625...

Page 141: ...leaner Transfer separation charging wire cleaner motor M6 Transfer separation charging wire cleaner motor drive command TSCLM J108A 1 19 rear front DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 27 ...

Page 142: ...eafter copying will be forced off after making about 200 copies The developing assembly is supplied with toner by the hopper assembly using the drive of the hopper motor 1 M11 The toner inside the hopper assembly is stirred by the hopper motor 2 M10 The toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is moved to the rear of the copier by a feeding screw inside the cleaner assembly it is then forwarded thr...

Page 143: ...Developing clutch Hopper motor 1 Hopper motor 2 Waste toner feeding screw locked detection WTFL Developing clutch drive command DVLD Developing assembly toner level signal DTEP Hopper toner level signal TEP Hopper motor toner stirring drive command M10ON Hopper toner toner supply drive command M11ON Developing assembly M11 M10 CL8 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTE...

Page 144: ...0 and stop copying operation The level of toner inside the hopper is monitored by the hopper toner sensor while the hopper motor 1 M11 is operating to supply toner or while toner is being stirred When the toner inside the hopper falls below a specific level the hopper level detection signal goes 0 When the DC controller PCB has detected the signal for 1 sec or more it will indicate the Add Toner m...

Page 145: ...ral kHz and the output of the sensor goes 0 In the presence of toner on the other hand the weight of the toner stops the oscillation and the output of the sensor goes 1 Figure 4 203 If the developing assembly is not set inside the copier do not install the developing assembly locking assembly Otherwise the toner collecting in the path from the hopper to the developing assembly can pour out because...

Page 146: ...rol Timing Table 4 201 Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder VDB Dark area Light area Bias VDB VL2 100 V Toner COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 32 Bias DC component AC component 1500 Vp p 2700 Hz Voltage 600V 600V VL2 100 V Period CNTR1 2 INTR AER LSTR during copying SCFW SCRV during copying Descript...

Page 147: ...py Start key ON Main motor M1 AC bias INTR SCFW LSTR STBY 600 V DC bias DC bias Developing clutch CL8 AER SCRV SCFW SCRV Potential control value VL2 100 V Power switchON WMUP Main motor M1 AC bias INTR CNTR1 LSTR STBY CNTR2 600V DC bias DC bias Developing clutch CL8 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 33 ...

Page 148: ...t key ON Main motor M1 AC bias INTR 600V DC bias DC bias Developing clutch CL8 Potential control value VL2 100 V CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCRV SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 34 ...

Page 149: ...emote signal ACBTP is 1 Drive circuit goes ON AC bias switch circuit goes ON The above condition causes the high voltage transformer to increase the high voltage transformer to 1500 Vp p and supply it to the developing assembly Figure 4 208 DC controller PCB Q156 master Micro processor D A converter Switch circuit Drive circuit Switch circuit Drive circuit DC transformer T402 AC wave generation AC...

Page 150: ...it The circuit used to control the roller electrode bias is equipped with the following functions a Turning on and off the roller electrode q Roller electrode ON signal High voltage DC remote signal DCBTP 1 Roller bias signal ROED 1 Switch circuit goes ON High voltage transformer drive circuit goes ON DC transformer T402 goes ON The above condition supplies the roller electrode with a bias of abou...

Page 151: ...Output from the DC controller PCB connector No Table 4 202 Combination of Developing DC Roller Electrode Bias Output Signals COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 37 Switching signal Control signal Signal DCBTP ACBTP ROED ACON DCBC HVT output J114A 10 J114A 3 J114A 1 J114A 7 J114A 2 DC bias ON 1 1 1 0 3 11V...

Page 152: ...r A is monitored by the waste toner feeding screw detecting switch MS4 When MS4 is pushed by the gear A the main motor M1 will stop and the DC controller will indicate E013 on the control panel Figure 4 210 rear view Waste toner Waste toner pipe Waste toner feeding screw Cleaning assembly waste toner feeding screw Cleaning assembly DC controller PCB M1 Gear A Waste toner feeding screw detecting WT...

Page 153: ...ricity Do not leave it out during assembly work 5 The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity Do not leave them out during assembly work 6 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 7 Before sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly check to make sure that the front door switch or the power...

Page 154: ...face of the scanning lamp 3 If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled dry wipe it 4 Do not leave fingerprints on the reflecting shade 5 Do not deform the reflecting shade 6 To install the lens hood fit the boss of the lens hood in the cut off of the rail at the front and then engage the hook at the rear while turning the lens hood slightly clockwise r q q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6...

Page 155: ...nd 5 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the thermal fuse w Figure 4 303 B Standard White Plate 1 Remove the RDF 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the copyboard glass right retaining plate w Figure 4 304 q w q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 41 ...

Page 156: ...move the six mounting screws e and remove the RDF mount cover r 6 Remove the two mounting screws t and remove the rear top cover y Figure 4 306 e e r r t t y e e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 42 ...

Page 157: ...lide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the process unit See p 7 18 3 Remove the primary charging assembly and the pre transfer charging assembly 4 Remove the blanking exposure lamp assembly 5 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the blanking exposure assembly rail stay w Figure 4 308 q q w u u i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPO...

Page 158: ... slide out the hopper assembly 2 Disconnect the two connectors q and remove the mounting screw w then slide out the blanking exposure lamp assembly e slowly Figure 4 310 When removing the blanking exposure lamp assembly take care so as not to damage the photosensitive drum q q w e q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE F...

Page 159: ...ve drum near a window or in an area exposed to direct rays of the sun e Do not work in an area where the temperature humidity changes abruptly or subject to a high low temperature humidity r Do not work in an area subject to dust ammonium gas or organic gas The foregoing points apply equally to all types of photosensitive drums 1 Removing the Drum Unit 1 Open the front door and slide out the hoppe...

Page 160: ...drum t Figure 4 313 Remove the photosensitive drum while taking care not to damage it You need not remove the bearing at the rear and the gear at the front of the photosensitive drum t e e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 46 Caution ...

Page 161: ...case to protect it from soiling and damage 3 Pull out the flange at the front and disconnect the connector then remove the drum heater from the photosensitive drum 3 Installing the Photosensitive Drum Install the photosensitive drum by reversing the steps used to remove it During the work be sure to take care avoiding trapping of the cables drum heater and dirt or damage drum surface q w COPYRIGHT...

Page 162: ...oosen the mounting screw q and slide the fixing member w upward then fix the fixing member in place 3 Disconnect the connector e and remove the primary charging assembly r Figure 4 315 After installing the primary charging assembly execute wire cleaning in user mode You need not perform this step if the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100 C or less since wire cleaning will be exe...

Page 163: ...t perform this step if the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100 C or less since wire cleaning will be executed automatically I Transfer Separation Charging Assembly 1 Removing the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly 1 Open the front door and slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the fixing feeding front cover 3 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the fixing guide w Figur...

Page 164: ...ransfer separation charging assembly r to the front then remove it by lifting it toward the left Figure 4 318 e r A B COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 50 ...

Page 165: ...ion charging assembly in the cut off w of the frame of the fixing feeding unit 2 Be sure to put the leaf spring e of the fixing feeding unit into contact with the frame of the transfer separation charging assembly when sliding it from the front Figure 4 319 Figure 4 320 Figure 4 321 w w w e q q q q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPT...

Page 166: ...e wire cleaning in user mode You need not perform this step if the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100 C or less since wire cleaning will be executed automatically t r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 52 ...

Page 167: ...s a rule with the exception of the grid wire all charging wires are strung in the same way here the charging assembly is used to show the steps 1 Remove the shielding plate left right of the charging assembly To prevent deformation slack of the charging assembly be sure to remove the left and the right shielding plates individually i e do not loosen the mounting screws q of both plates at the same...

Page 168: ... and twist the wire 4 Cut the end excess of the twisted wire with a nipper 5 Hook the loop on the stud Figure 4 325 6 Hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner at the rear then hook the wire on the charging wire tension spring as shown in Figure 4 326 and twist it Figure 4 326 Stud Reel Charging corona electrode front Charging wire rear COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV...

Page 169: ...e middle and its gold plating has not peeled It is in the V groove of the charging wire positioner Figure 4 328 Primary Charging Wire 9 Install the cushion at the front of the charging wire This does not apply to the primary charging assembly 10 Install the shielding plates left right For other charging assemblies install the two lids correct wrong Grid side correct wrong COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC ...

Page 170: ...lates in place 2 Loosen the three mounting screws used to keep the motor unit at the front in place Figure 4 329 3 Loosen the mounting screw and move the grid in the direction shown in Figure 4 330 then fix it in place temporarily Figure 4 330 4 Free a length about 5 cm of wire from the charging wire reel 0 1 mm dia and form a loop at the end 2 mm dia Screw Screws COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP...

Page 171: ...re with a nipper 9 Tighten the screw loosened in step 3 Turn the screw until the tension of the grid wire is even Pay attention to avoid deformation and slack if necessary try to tighten the mounting screw on the left right shielding plate at the front earlier 10 Tighten the mounting screws loosened in steps 1 and 2 11 Wipe the grid wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol q Check to make ...

Page 172: ...turn of the screw changes the position of the charging wire by about 0 7 mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 58 Charging assembly Primary Pre transfer Transfer Separation Tolerance 1mm No mechanism 2mm 2mm Height of charging wire 16 2 0 5 mm 14 9 0 5 mm 10 2 0 5mm 9 5 1 0 0 mm 7 5 1 5 0 mm 7 5 1 5 0 mm...

Page 173: ...embly 4 Remove the process unit See p 7 18 5 Remove the two screws q and remove the blanking exposure rail stay w Figure 4 333 6 Clean the primary charging assembly anti stray sheet e Figure 4 334 e q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 59 ...

Page 174: ...g assembly can start to pour out because of the vibrations caused by inspection repair work 1 Removing the Developing Assembly from the Copier 1 Open the multifeeder door then remove the mounting screw and remove the door stopper tape 2 Remove the mounting screw q and push the developing assembly locking assembly w in the direction of the arrow to remove Figure 4 335 3 Disconnect the connector e a...

Page 175: ...stalled to a very high precision Do not remove it on its own in the field You must remove its mounting plate 3 Installing the Blade Install the blade by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind Force the blade mounting plate against the developing assembly housing and fix it in place with two mounting screws Before installing the blade place copy paper on the developing cyl...

Page 176: ... unit w Figure 4 339 Exercise care as the gear engaged with the screw becomes free when the gear unit is removed 4 Remove the grip ring e mounted to the cylinder shaft at the rear then remove the gear r parallel pin t and butting roll y one each Figure 4 340 e r t y q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM...

Page 177: ...ectrode plate Figure 4 341 6 Remove the mounting screw o and remove the polarity positioning plate 0 Figure 4 342 o 0 u i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 63 ...

Page 178: ...re 4 344 9 Remove the bearing 5 at the front and the rear and remove the developing cylinder 6 Figure 4 345 Do not leave fingerprints or oils on the surface of the developing cylinder If any dry wipe the surface with lint free paper Do not use solvent 5 5 6 3 3 4 1 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 64...

Page 179: ...ray Sheet 1 Remove the developing assembly and clean the developing assembly anti stray sheet q Figure 4 346 q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 65 ...

Page 180: ...y from the copier See p 4 60 2 Slide out the hopper assembly to the front See p 7 18 3 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the hopper assembly w Figure 4 347 q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 66 ...

Page 181: ...18 2 Disconnect the connector q on the AC line of the drum heater 3 Remove the four mounting screws w and remove the cleaning blade assembly e Figure 4 349 w w e q Cleaning blade Separation claw COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 67 ...

Page 182: ...igure 4 351 3 Installing the Cleaning Blade Install the cleaning blade by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind 1 Butt the cleaning blade q against the rear Figure 4 352 q No gap Blade retaining plate y r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 68 ...

Page 183: ...is not appreciably wavy Be sure to clean the groove in which the blade of the blade support plate is mounted as the presence of toner or the like can cause the blade to become wavy 4 Installing the Side Seal 1 Install the side seal q as shown both ends be sure it will not extend over the inner side of the cleaner housing Figure 4 354 q q w w e r t Order of tightening COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON...

Page 184: ... Remove the toner collecting on the surface of the magnetic roller Scoop up with copy paper shaped in the form of the letter U Figure 4 355a Figure 4 355b Toner guide roller 4 8mm Side scraper front Magnet roller Waste toner to be remove front 30 40mm A Toner guide roller 4 8mm Side scraper rear Magnet roller Waste toner to be removed rear 30 40mm A COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV...

Page 185: ... the Drum Unit 1 Remove the process unit from the copier See p 7 18 1 Take care not to bend the separation claw 2 Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum 2 Remove the screw q and remove the No 2 insulating plate w 3 Remove the screw e and remove the claw holder r Figure 4 356 e e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 4 ...

Page 186: ...e waste toner drive assembly together with the waste toner feeding assembly 6 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the waste toner feeding screw detection circuit w Figure 4 357 7 Remove the two mounting screws r and remove the waste toner feeding assembly t from the waste toner drive assembly Figure 4 358 r t q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPR...

Page 187: ...1st side 5 24 B Making Two Sided Copies 2nd side 5 26 C Making Overlay Copies 2nd side 5 28 D Reversal Delivery 5 32 E Switching the Paper Size for Two Sided Overlay Reversal Delivery Copies 5 34 F Re Pick Up from the Holding Tray 5 37 G Skipping Operation 5 38 VII DETECTING JAMS 5 46 A Outline 5 46 VIII DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 5 60 A Multifeeder Assembly 5 61 B Front Paper Deck Assembly 5 71 C R...

Page 188: ...er deflecting plate When making one sided copies the copy paper picked up from the cassette front paper deck or multifeeder is controlled by the registration roller so that its leading edge matches the leading edge of the photosensitive drum the paper is then moved through the transfer separation feeding fixing and delivery assemblies and then ultimately to the copy tray When making two sided over...

Page 189: ...or PS9 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS27 Pick up vertical path 3 paper sensor PS10 External delivery sensor PS30 Pick up vertical path 4 paper sensor PS12 Internal delivery sensor reversing assembly PS33 Pick up vertical path 1 paper sensor PS14 Holding tray registration paper sensor PS36 Pick up vertical path 2 paper sensor PS15 Holding tray inlet paper sensor PS47 Fixing assembly...

Page 190: ...ding try assembly Copy tray Holding try feeding assembly Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Right deck Left deck PS22 PS33 PS24 PS37 PS8 PS49 PS39 PS35 PS34 PS9 PS17 PS14 PS12 PS10 PS47 PS52 PS36 PS27 PS25 PS28PS29 PS26 PS30 PS32 PS31 PS15 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 3 ...

Page 191: ... J117A 7 J130B 2 SL11 CL10 CL13 PS27 PS26 PS25 Vertical path 3 detection signal PS27D Cassette 3 pick up solenoid drive signal C3PURR Cassette 3 pick up clutch drive signal C3PUCD Cassette 3 lifter detection signal C3LTP Vertical path 4 feeding clutch drive signal CL13D Cassette 3 paper detection signal C3PD J130B 4 J130A 10 J130A 2 J130A 4 J130A 7 SL12 CL12 PS30 PS29 PS28 Paper path 4 detection s...

Page 192: ...rwarded to the registration roller by the vertical path roller The registration roller serves to make sure that the leading edge of the copy paper matches the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum 2 Sequence of Pick Up Operations Cassette 3 A4 2 Copies Continuous Figure 5 202 INTR Copy Start key ON Cassette 3 pick up clutch CL10 Pick up motor M2 Cassette 3 pick up releasing solenoid...

Page 193: ...ut of copy paper and the paper detecting lever moves away from the paper sensor PS26 PS29 the DC controller PCB indicates the Add Paper message on the control panel When you hold the grip of the cassette the light blocking plate moves away from the cassette open closed sensor 3 4 PS50 51 and the condition causes the lifter to move down Figure 5 203 paper present Figure 5 204 paper absent Lifter Pa...

Page 194: ...ing lever Pick up roller Lifter Separation roller Feeding rollers M14 M15 Pick up roller Pick up motor Cassette open closed sensor PS50 PS51 M Lifter position lever COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 7 ...

Page 195: ...s set when the guide plate is set to suit the copy paper 2 Identifying the Size of Copy Paper The copy paper length sensor consists of two photointerrupters and the length is identified with reference to combinations of the outputs of these two sensors The paper width sensor on the other hand is a variable resistor and the resistance output of the sensor is used to identify the width of paper Figu...

Page 196: ... Cassette Width guide front Width guide rear Paper width detecting VR Paper length sensor unit COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 9 ...

Page 197: ...s as reported by the user to determine whether the correct paper width is set This information is not disclosed to the user Table 5 201 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 10 Markings Paper Remarks A STMT R B A5 R C B5 R D KLGL R E GLTR R F G LGL G3 G A4 R H LGL LTR R I FLSC G2 J B4 B5 K G LTR G1 L 279 4 ...

Page 198: ...7 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 11 Paper length sensor PS102 PS104 SZ 2 0 PS101 PS103 SZ 1 0 Signal ON OFF A4 G4 G1 B5 STMT A5 G LTRR K LGLR B5R A5R STMTR PS102 PS104 SZ 2 0 PS101 PS103 SZ 1 1 LTRR A4R PS102 PS104 SZ 2 1 PS101 PS103 SZ 1 0 A3 279 4 431 8 11 17 B4 LGL PS102 PS104 SZ 2 1 PS101 PS103 SZ 1 1 G2 G3 Pap...

Page 199: ... B5 257 1 182 1 11 17 11 17 279 1 432 1 LETTER R LTRR 216 1 297 1 LETTER LTR 297 1 216 1 STATEMENT STMT 216 1 139 5 1 STATEMENT R STMTR 139 5 1 216 1 LEGAL LGL 216 1 356 1 KOREAN LEGAL K LGL 265 1 190 1 KOREAN LEGAL R K LGLR 190 1 265 1 FOOLSCAP FLSC 216 1 330 1 AUSTRALIAN FOOLSCAP A FLS 206 1 337 1 OFICIO OFI 216 1 317 1 ECUADORAN OFICIO E OFI 220 1 320 1 BOLIVIA B OFI OFICIO 216 1 355 1 ARGENTIN...

Page 200: ...ion signal RDEL J119A 4 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 pick up detection signal PS8D Left deck outlet paper sensor LEXTPD J121A 5 J122B 2 Left deck pick up roller releasing solenoid drive command LDPURR J121A 10 J121A 7 J121B 2 J119B 11 Right deck lifter motor drive command RDLMD J116B 2 Paper path 0 detection signal PS24D J116A 2 Right deck pick up clutch drive command RDPUCD Left deck pick up c...

Page 201: ...ler moves away from the surface of the paper The feeding roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of copy paper is fed to the feeding path the copy paper is forwarded to the registration roller by the work of the vertical path roller The registration roller controls the copy paper so that its leading edge matches the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum COPYRI...

Page 202: ...ensor PS33 Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch CL15 SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY SCRV INTR Copy Start key ON Right deck pick up clutch CL14 Pick up motor M2 Right deck pick up roller releasing solenoid SL4 Vertical path roller 0 paper sensor PS24 Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor PS33 Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch CL15 SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY SCRV COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 ...

Page 203: ...cases as when the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor arm has blocked the deck lifter position sensor PS31 PS34 Upon reaching the limit the lifter is held up by the work of a gear When the deck is detached from the copier the cable take up gear disengages from the gear and the lifter starts to move down on its own weight Figure 5 304 M2 Lifter limit sensor PS37 PS39 Lifter position sen...

Page 204: ... blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever lowers to block the lifter position sensor PS31 PS34 Pick up roller moves down the light blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever rises to leave away from the lifter position sensor PS31 PS34 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 17 ...

Page 205: ...37 PS39 detects the deck the deck limit signal is sent to the limit detection circuit on the DC controller PCB In response the limit detection circuit cuts off the deck drive signal coming from the microprocessor See Figure 5 306 Figure 5 306 Deck Limit Detection 2 cassettes left right deck Deck drive signal DC controller PCB PS31 PS34 M18 M19 PS37 PS39 Deck position sensor Deck lifter drive motor...

Page 206: ...rson is expected to enter the deck size D High Speed Pick Up When pick up occurs from the right deck the pick up motor M2 rotates at a high speed when picking up the first sheet so as to save on the first copy time the period of high speed rotation is as follows After the first sheet has reached the pick up vertical path sensor 0 PS24 and until it arches against the registration roller The rate of...

Page 207: ... solenoid SL10 turns on in release direction to move the pick up roller away from the copy paper then the multifeeder pick up relay solenoid SL15 turns off to move the paper with the registration roller and the holding roller Figure 5 401 DC controller PCB M2 CL7 SL15 SL10 Copy paper Tray Multifeeder pick up solenoid Pick up roller Feeding roller Holding roller To registration roller Separation ro...

Page 208: ...echanisms The length of paper when the multifeeder is selected is identified in reference to the time during which the pre registration paper sensor PS23 remains on You must enter the paper with basic value whenever you have replaced the variable resistor See Chapter 11 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value Figure 5 402 DC controller PCB Variable resistor Slide guide rear Slide guide front Multi...

Page 209: ...ion paper sensor PS23 Registration roller drive clutch CL9 Scanner motor M3 SCFW Multifeeder pick up solenoid pick up direction SL10 Multifeeder pick up relay solenoid SL15 SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR Scanner motor reverse rotation reverse direction COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 22 ...

Page 210: ...iginal to Overlay copy Copying on 1st side Copying on 2nd side Copying on 1st side Copying on 2nd side Copying on 1st side Copying on 2nd side Copying on 1st side left Coping on 2nd side right Copying on 1st side left Coping on 2nd side right Copying on 1st side Copying on 2nd side Copying on 1st side Copying on 2nd side Coping on 2nd side right Copying on 1st side left B B B B B A B B B B B B B 0...

Page 211: ...ted to assist stacking The holding tray is capable of holding as many as 50 sheets Figure 5 601 DC controller PCB J108A 7 Registration paper detection signal RGPD J108B 4 Fixing assembly outlet paper detection signal FXDEL J108A 19 Fixing assembly inlet paper detection signal FXCJS J113B 10 Holding tray inlet paper sensor PS15D J108B 12 Delivery paper deflecting solenoid drive command DPDSD J113B ...

Page 212: ...nsor PS15 Holding tray forward clutch CL5 Holding tray X motor M8 Holding tray swinging solenoid SL9 Holding tray re pick up roller solenoid SL6 Holding tray X home position sensor PS21 Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid SL2 Holding tray Y motor M9 Holding tray Y home position sensor PS20 Holding tray re circulating lever motor M7 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 ...

Page 213: ...113A 5 J112A 9 J108A 7 J112A 7 J119A 7 Holding tray registration clutch drive command HTRGCD Holding tray pick up detection signal PS17D Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper detection signal PS9D Holding tray Y home position signal HTYHP Holding tray re circulating bar home position signal HTLPD Holding tray separation clutch drive command HTSPCD Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper detection si...

Page 214: ... LSTR SCRV Holding tray weight solenoid SL7 Holding tray re pick up roller solenoid SL6 Holding tray pick up sensor PS17 Holding tray registration paper sensor PS14 Holding tray registration clutch CL3 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS9 Registration paper sensor PS23 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDI...

Page 215: ...L8 PS14 PS17 Holding tray inlet roller Feeding roller Holding tray registration roller Holding tray reversing registration roller J113A 5 J113B 8 J113A 7 J113A 6 J113A 3 J113B 9 J113B 11 Holding tray pick up detection signal PS17D Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid drive command HTPDD Holding tray registration paper detection signal PS14D Holding tray reversing clutch drive command HTRVC...

Page 216: ... the trailing edge of the copy paper leaves the holding tray paper deflecting plate the holding tray forward clutch CL5 turns off to stop the copy paper Figure 5 607 PS14 Holding tray paper deflecting plate COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 29 ...

Page 217: ... reaching the holding tray registration roller the copy paper is moved to the registration roller through the holding tray feeding assembly Figure 5 609 PS14 To holding tray feeding assembly Holding tray registration roller COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 30 ...

Page 218: ... Holding tray pick up sensor PS17 Holding tray registration paper sensor PS14 Holding tray registration clutch CL3 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS9 Registration paper sensor PS23 Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid SL8 Holding tray forward clutch CL5 Holding tray inlet paper sensor PS15 Holding tray reversing clutch CL4 SCFW SCRV COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP625...

Page 219: ...utlet sensor PS47 the holding tray forward clutch CL5 turns off and at the same time the holding tray reversing clutch CL4 turns on This condition causes the roller inside the holding tray to rotate in reverse moving the copy paper in the direction of delivery See Figure 5 612 Figure 5 611 clockwise rotation Figure 5 612 counterclockwise rotation CL5 PS47 PS12 CL4 M2 CL5 PS47 PS12 CL4 SL2 M2 Pick ...

Page 220: ...tray inlet paper sensor PS15 Holding tray forward clutch CL5 Holding tray X motor M8 Holding tray reversing clutch CL4 External paper delivery sensor PS10 Holding tray X home position sensor PS21 Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid SL2 Holding tray Y motor M9 Holding tray Y home position sensor PS20 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON...

Page 221: ...g to the size of copy paper so that the motor rotates in reverse to move the paper size guide plate to suit the selected copy size and keep it in wait for the arrival of copy paper While copying on the second side the motor M8 M9 remains at rest until copying on the first side of the next copy starts Figure 5 614 DC controller PCB M8 M9 Holding tray Y motor Holding tray X motor CW rotation CCW rot...

Page 222: ...e of the holding tray so as to put the edges of the sheets flush thereby preventing skew movement during re pick up Figure 5 615 When copy paper reaches the holding tray assembly the motor M9 rotates clockwise and couterclockwise to operate the trailing edge guide plate to arrange the trailing edge of the copy paper Figure 5 616 Clockwise Counterclockwise Trailing edge guide plate Copy paper ON SL...

Page 223: ...cked up the re circulating lever falls down to the holding tray This condition enables the holding tray re circulating lever home position sensor PS19 to assume that the last sheet has been picked up and the sensor generates the last copy detection signal HPLPD Figure 5 617 Holding tray re circulating motor M7 Copy paper Re circulating lever Holding tray re circulating lever home position sensor P...

Page 224: ...ht plate on the copy paper so as to assist feeding of copy paper If double feeding occurs i e if two or more sheets are being sent to the feeding roller separation belt by the holding tray re pick up roller the separation belt serves to push the top sheet back to the holding tray Reference The weight plate is lowered only when the first sheet is re picked up and when the last sheet is picked up Fi...

Page 225: ...s executed automatically when the following conditions are met Two sided copies are made of one sided originals using the RDF The copy paper and the original are A4 B5 or LTR and they are fed horizontally Neither binding mode nor cover mode is selected Copy count is 2 or lower Originals Original to be skipped Photosensitive drum Registration roller Copy paper Holding tray feeding assembly Space CO...

Page 226: ...s 5th original 3rd 1st 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 4th 2nd original c Making 1 Copy of 4 Originals 4th original 2nd 3rd 1st original d Making 1 Copy of 5 Originals 5th original 3rd 1st 4th 2nd original Reference Skipping mode may be disabled in user mode COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 39 ...

Page 227: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 40 ...

Page 228: ...the back of 4th copy sheet picked up from the holding tray 10 The 2nd original is picked up 11 The 2nd original is copied 2nd copy 12 The 1st original is picked up 13 The 1st original is copied on the back of the 2nd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray The 4th original is not copied skipped but is returned to the original tray of the RDF If making two copies each repeats steps 6 through 13 ...

Page 229: ...iginal is picked up 18 The 1st original is copied 2nd copy The 5th original is not copied skipped but is returned to the original tray of the RDF 19 The 5th copy sheet picked up from the holding tray is moved through the delivery assembly reversed and discharged 2nd copy 20 The 4th original is picked up 6 The 1st original is picked up 7 The 1st original is copied 8 The 5th copy sheet picked up fro...

Page 230: ...f the 3rd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray 2nd copy and the copy sheet is moved through the delivery assembly reversed and discharged The 3rd original is not copied skipped but is returned to the original tray of the RDF 22 The 2nd original is picked up 23 The 2nd original is copied on the back of the 1st copy sheet picked up from the holding tray 2nd copy and the copy sheet is moved thr...

Page 231: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON 5 44 ...

Page 232: ...a If copies are made of an odd number of originals in reversal delivery and skipping modes they will be stacked as shown in Figure 5 623a Figure 5 623a b If copies are made of an odd number of originals in reversal delivery and skipping modes they will be stacked on the copy tray as shown in Figure 5 623b Figure 5 623b 2 3 1 2 3 1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTE...

Page 233: ...r instructions on how to remove jams after the suspension of operation Figure 5 701 Photo sensitive drum Pre transfer roller Registration roller Pick up assembly functional coverage Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 PS27 PS36 PS24 PS33 PS8 PS49 Holding tray feeding assembly PS9 PS17 PS14 Delivery paper deflecting plate Delivery assembly PS10 PS47 Fixing assembly Feeding assembly Holding t...

Page 234: ...r sensor Holding tray inlet paper sensor Holding tray pick up sensor Holing tray re circulating bar home position sensor Registration paper sensor Type of jam Delay stationa ry jams Delay stationa ry jams Delay stationa ry jams Stationary jams Delay stationa ry jams Delay stationa ry jams Delay jams Paper on holding tray Delay stationa ry jams Notation PS24 PS27 PS30 PS33 PS36 PS47 PS49 PS52 Notat...

Page 235: ...stationary jam identified by the registration paper sensor PS23 2 Pick up vertical path feeding stationary jam identified by the pick up vertical path 1 paper sensor PS33 3 Pick up vertical path feeding stationary jam identified by the pick up vertical path 0 paper sensor PS24 4 Pick up vertical path feeding stationary jam identified by the pick up vertical path 2 paper sensor PS36 5 Pick up verti...

Page 236: ...Pick up motor M2 Multifeeder pick up clutch CL7 Copy Start key ON Pick up vertical path 1 sensor PS33 Pick up vertical path 0 sensor PS24 Pick up vertical path 2 sensor PS36 Pick up vertical path 3 sensor PS27 Pick up vertical path 4 sensor PS30 Left deck pick up sensor PS49 INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV Jam indicator ON 0 4 sec 0 7 sec 0 9 sec 1 4 sec 1 7 sec 2 1 sec 1 7 sec Normal Error COPYRIGHT 199...

Page 237: ...rtical path 0 paper sensor PS24 Copy Start key ON Normal Error Jam indicator I Varies according to paper length I Right deck cassette 1 pick up clutch CL14 Pick up vertical path 1 paper sensor PS33 Jam indicator Normal Jam check Pick up motor M2 PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW Pick up vertical path 0 paper sensor PS24 Copy Start key ON Error COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTE...

Page 238: ...PS36 Pick up vertical path 4 paper sensor PS30 Copy Start key ON Error Error I Varies according to paper length I I I Normal Normal Normal SCFW Jam indicator SCFW SCRV Error PKUPR Left deck pick up clutch CL16 Pick up vertical path 3 paper sensor PS27 Jam check Pick up motor M2 Pick up vertical path 2 paper sensor PS36 Pick up vertical path 4 paper sensor PS30 Copy Start key ON Normal COPYRIGHT 19...

Page 239: ...check Main motor Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor PS47 Normal I I Varies according to paper length Registration paper sensor PS23 SCFW LSTR Jam indicator SCRV SCFW SCRV Error Jam check Main motor M1 Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor PS47 Normal 1 1 sec COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 52 ...

Page 240: ... SCRV LSTR I Varies according to paper length Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor PS47 Jam indicator I SCFW Normal Error Jam check Main motor M1 External delivery paper sensor PS10 SCRV LSTR I For normal delivery about 0 25 sec For reversal delivery varies according to paper length COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEED...

Page 241: ...otor M2 Internal delivery sensor PS12 SCRV LSTR Normal I I Varies according to paper length Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor PS47 Jam indicator 0 2 sec SCFW Normal Error Jam check Pick up motor M2 Internal delivery sensor PS12 SCRV LSTR COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 54 ...

Page 242: ... up motor M2 Holding tray inlet sensor PS15 LSTR Normal I Error I Varies according to paper length Internal delivery sensor PS12 Jam indicator SCFW Error Jam check Pick up motor M2 Holding tray inlet sensor PS15 LSTR Normal 0 2 sec COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 55 ...

Page 243: ...ormal Error Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW I In two sided copying 0 1 sec In overlay copying varies according to paper length I Holding tray separation clutch CL6 Jam indicator Jam check Pick up motor M2 Holding tray pick up sensor PS17 Normal Error Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 ...

Page 244: ...ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW Pick up motor M2 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor PS8 Error Holding tray registration delay jam check Jam indicator ON Jam check Pick up motor M2 Holding tray registration paper sensor PS14 Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV I I Varies according to paper length Normal Error COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPR...

Page 245: ...rt key ON PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW Holding tray feeding 1 2 delay jam Jam indicator ON Jam check Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS9 Normal Error Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW I Pick up motor M2 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor PS8 I Varies according to paper length COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5...

Page 246: ...ormal Error Jam check Pick up motor M2 Claw jam sensor PS52 SCRV LSTR Left deck pick up delay jam check Jam indicator ON Jam check Pick up motor M2 Left deck outlet paper sensor PS49 Copy Start key ON PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW I I Varies according to paper length COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 59 ...

Page 247: ...othed washer to protect against static electricity Do not leave it out during assembly work 5 The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity Do not leave them out during assembly work 6 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 7 Before sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly check to make ...

Page 248: ...en the multifeeder door Remove the door tape and lift the multifeeder assembly to detach it from the hinge 2 Removing the Pick Up Roller 1 Open the multifeeder paper guide 2 Remove the two stop rings q each left right two shutters each w and two rollers e each Figure 5 802 q q w w e q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP F...

Page 249: ... The pick up roller used at the front and that used at the rear are NOT interchangeable The collar on the pick up roller to be used at the front is silver in color When installing the pick up roller q to the pick up assembly be sure to orient it so that the round marking w on the collar silver is toward the front of the copier q Pick up roller w Marking collar Figure 5 803 q w Direction of rotatio...

Page 250: ...llar gold are toward the rear r Pick up roller t Marking roller y Marking collar Figure 5 803a 4 Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the multifeeder assembly 2 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the registration upper roller assembly w Figure 5 804 q q w r t y Direction of rotation Collar gold rear COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME A...

Page 251: ... Remove the two mounting screws u and remove the separation roller support plate i 5 Remove the joint and remove the separation roller o Take care when removing the separation roller as the bushing at the front becomes disengaged Figure 5 806 u i o e r t y COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 64 Caution ...

Page 252: ...ferent part types Figure 5 806a 5 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Remove the multifeeder assembly 2 Remove the separation roller 3 Remove the pick up roller from the front and remove the stop ring 4 Remove the stop ring q at the front of the feeding roller assembly then remove the feeding roller assembly e together with the timing belt w Figure 5 807 w e q Urethane sponge COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CA...

Page 253: ...e the mounting screw e and remove the solenoid r together with the support plate Figure 5 808 2 Remove the two mounting screws t and remove the grip y Figure 5 809 t y q w e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 66 ...

Page 254: ... 5 810 4 Remove the two mounting screws 0 and remove the lower cover 1 Figure 5 811 5 Remove the two mounting screws 2 and remove the guide plate 3 Figure 5 812 2 3 0 1 u u u u i o COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 67 ...

Page 255: ...er Assembly Force the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A open state Move the slide volume in the direction of B and attach the timing belt to the pulley Figure 5 814 Pulley Pulley Timing belt Rack plate Section A Side volume B 4 5 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 68 ...

Page 256: ...essure of the Pick Up Feeding Roller of the Multifeeder If double feeding or pick up failure occurs during pick up adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A If pick up failure occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow B Figure 5 816 B A q w e 5 5 front COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 ...

Page 257: ...on of A to adjust so that the gap between the shutter q and the shutter plate w when the solenoid is pulled is 0 4 0 2 mm Figure 5 817 Figure 5 818 q w 0 4 0 2mm 0 4 0 2mm A COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 70 ...

Page 258: ...1 Remove the left right stopper q to the paper deck and remove the paper deck Figure 5 820 left of right deck Figure 5 820a right of right deck q q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 71 ...

Page 259: ...de the deck and remove the front and rear guide plates t Figure 5 821 4 Mark the position of the latch assembly then remove the left and right mounting screws y 7 in total and remove the latch assembly u 5 Remove the gear cover i from the front right Figure 5 822a left y u w w r t q e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP F...

Page 260: ...ove the mounting screw o at the front and free the oil damper plate 0 Figure 5 823 o 0 y y u i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 73 ...

Page 261: ...le holding the rear gear and the spring in place remove the E ring 3 then while sliding out the pulley cover toward the front detach the cable 5 from the pulley cover 4 9 Detach the end of the cable from the pulley Figure 5 825 3 4 5 1 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 74 ...

Page 262: ...he mounting screw 8 from the cable relay assembly at the rear and remove the stop 9 Figure 5 827 12 Remove the two mounting screws 0 and remove the grip assembly 1 Figure 5 828 0 1 8 9 6 7 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 75 ...

Page 263: ...ening the fixing screw on the hook fixing plate and ultimately deforming the hook fixing plate The deformation will hinder locking if the left compartment at the correct position and will gradually shift it to the front encouraging deformation even more and ultimately leading to faulty registration and displacement of the left compartment 2 3 2 3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 ...

Page 264: ... size otherwise skip the steps that follow You need however to attach the A4 size label 1 Slide out the deck to the front until it stops 2 Remove the three mounting screws q on the guide plates front rear rear left then remove the three guide plates w Figure 5 830 q q q w w w front rear COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP...

Page 265: ...e plates They are perpendicular to the base of the deck They are parallel to the metal plates on the deck front and rear 4 Place copy paper in the deck and slide the deck in the machine 5 Enter the new deck paper size in the copier s service mode 5 LTR B5 A4 AL LTR LTR B5 B5 A4 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING ...

Page 266: ... the deck then shift the latch assembly w to the front and rear until the position is as indicated in Figure 5 833 Figure 5 832a left Figure 5 832b right Figure 5 833 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 1 5mm q w q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 79 ...

Page 267: ... and the cassette because of the lifter 3 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the connector cover w then disconnect the two connectors e 4 Remove the two mounting screws r and remove the pick up assembly t Figure 5 834 2 Removing the Pick Up Roller 1 Remove the pick up assembly 2 Remove the two stop rings q on the outside and remove the pick up roller w in the direction of the arrow Figure 5 83...

Page 268: ...rking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar gold face the front of the machine Figure 5 836a The collar of the pick up roller at the rear is silver in color When installing the pick up roller r to the pick up assembly make sure that the round marking t on the collar silver is toward the rear Figure 5 836b r t Direction of rotation Collar silver rear q w e Direction of r...

Page 269: ...r and the pick up roller t at the front then remove the feeding roller u together with the timing belt y Figure 5 837 4 Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the two mounting screws and remove the feeding guide plate w then remove the open close guide e Figure 5 838 q w e q w e r t y u COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK U...

Page 270: ...d on the roller is initially pink and changes to yellow over time accelerated by exposure to light pink to orange and then to yellow The fact is common to all urethane sponge types and will not affect its physical performance Keep in mind that color difference if any does not indicate different part types y r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME A...

Page 271: ...ion roller If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of B If pick up failure occurs move the spring in the direction of A q Feeding roller e Pressure lever w Separation roller r Pressure spring Figure 5 841 q w e r A B COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 84 ...

Page 272: ...cing it Figure 5 842 If the separation roller is installed in the wrong orientation interference with the clamping washer can cause problems Wider groove Narrower groove front rear COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 85 Caution ...

Page 273: ...f the copier q Feeding roller assembly r Feeding roller shaft w Belt pulley t Marking roller e Feeding roller Figure 5 843 8 Positioning the Pick Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the Deck As shown in Figure 5 844 adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left end of the right solenoid arm 2 is 57 2 0 5 mm from the center of the hole A in the solenoid mount Figure 5 844 A 57 2 0 5mm w q r 5 5 ...

Page 274: ... Figure 5 845 10 Adjusting the Registration of the Cassette Loosen the screw w shown in Figure 5 846 and adjust the position of the cassette hook plate q After making adjustments enter the paper width basic value in serviced mode 4 as instructed in Chapter 11 Figure 5 846 Figure 5 847 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 1 5mm q w 36 0 5mm A q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPA...

Page 275: ...sembly e Figure 5 848 When installing the left deck pick up assembly slide out the holding tray feeding assembly slightly to the front Pay attention to the engagement of the gear 2 Removing the Pick Up Roller 1 Remove the left deck pick up assembly from the copier 2 Remove the stop ring q from the front and the rear then remove the pick up roller w Figure 5 849 w q w e q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON I...

Page 276: ...g w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar gold face the front Figure 5 850a The collar of the pick up roller used at the rear is silver in color When installing the pick up roller r to the pick up assembly make sure that the round marking t on the collar silver is toward the rear of the machine Figure 5 850b r t Direction of rotation Collar silver rear q w e Direction of ...

Page 277: ...he Separation Roller 1 Remove the left deck pick up assembly from the copier 2 Remove the mounting screw q and detach the separation roller assembly w from the joint Figure 5 852 3 Remove the separation roller e from the separation roller shaft mount Take care not to lose the pin from the roller q w q w e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JA...

Page 278: ... any does not indicate different part types 5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller Assembly of the Left Deck Pick Up Assembly When orienting the feeding roller assembly q to the left pick up assembly make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r make sure that the marking 5 faces the front e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP635...

Page 279: ...pen the upper right door and the lower right door 2 Remove the right deck pick up assembly cassette pick up assembly 3 Remove the two mounting screws q and disconnect the connector then remove the pick up vertical path roller assembly w Figure 5 855 q q w w q r 5 5 e t front COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYS...

Page 280: ...ing feeding front cover and remove the transfer separation charging assembly 3 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the right rail support plate w then remove the registration feeding assembly pressure spring e Figure 5 857 q w e Registration feeding assembly COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 93 ...

Page 281: ...t Figure 5 858 3 Removing the Registration Roller upper rubber roller 1 Loosen the two set screws q on the electromagnetic clutch at the rear 2 Remove the spring w E ring e spacer r bushing t and bearing y Figure 5 859 q w e rty r t y u COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 94 ...

Page 282: ... the front 4 Remove the pre transfer upper guide 2 and remove the registration roller upper rubber roller 3 Figure 5 860 u i 2 3 o 0 1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 95 ...

Page 283: ...witch assembly cover and close the hopper assembly 2 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 3 Remove the screw q one each at left and right and remove the fixing feeding unit stopper w Figure 5 862 left stopper q w Feeding assembly COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 96 ...

Page 284: ... 3 Removing the Feeding Belt 1 Remove the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding front cover 3 Remove the E ring q spacer w and bearing e at the front Figure 5 864 q we q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 97 Caution ...

Page 285: ...gure 5 865 5 Remove the E ring t gear y and pin u at the rear 6 Remove the E ring i and bearing o at the rear Figure 5 866 t yu io e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 98 ...

Page 286: ... 2 then remove the screw 3 and remove the cord guide 4 Figure 5 867 8 Remove the two screws 5 and remove the handle support plate 6 Figure 5 868 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 99 ...

Page 287: ...5 869 front 10 Remove the screw 0 and remove the feeding upper plate 9 at the front then remove the feeding belt 1 and the postcard belt 2 Figure 5 870 0 9 1 2 front 7 8 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 100 ...

Page 288: ...n q Holding tray re pick up roller D cut roller solenoid SL6 w Holding tray reversing clutch CL4 e Holding tray forward clutch CL5 r Holding tray separation clutch CL6 t Holding tray registration clutch CL3 Figure 5 871b rear view q w e r t q w e r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 101 ...

Page 289: ... front and out of the copier 2 Remove the screw e 1 each and remove the inlet assembly front upper cover q and the inlet assembly rear cover w then remove the two screws t and disconnect the two connectors y to remove the sided guide plate r Figure 5 872 3 Remove the three mounting screws u front Figure 5 873 front u u q w e r t y COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTE...

Page 290: ...ding Tray Registration Paper Sensor 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier 3 Remove the holding tray re pick up assembly 4 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the registration paper sensor assembly w Figure 5 875 q q w i i o 0 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING ...

Page 291: ...ving the Holding Tray Driver PCB 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier 3 Turn over the holding tray assembly 4 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the holding tray driver PCB cover w Figure 5 877 q w q w w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 10...

Page 292: ... 5 878 7 Removing the Holding Tray Y Motor 1 Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier 2 Turn over the holding tray assembly 3 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the right rail w Figure 5 879 q q w e r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 105 ...

Page 293: ...g screws y then turn over the holding tray Y motor assembly u and disconnect the connector Figure 5 881 7 Remove the two mounting screws and remove the holding tray Y motor u y y e r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 106 ...

Page 294: ...y 3 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the Y motor home position sensor assembly w Figure 5 882 9 Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly 1 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the inlet assembly front upper cover w Figure 5 883 q w q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 107 ...

Page 295: ...ly rear upper cover r Figure 5 884 3 Remove the two mounting screws t and remove the inlet assembly y Figure 5 885 t t y e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 108 ...

Page 296: ...the holding tray inlet assembly 3 Remove the mounting screw q Figure 5 886 4 While opening the left cover w remove the feeding roller separation belt assembly e Figure 5 887 w e q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 109 ...

Page 297: ...d the bushing w at the front Figure 5 888 3 Remove the stop ring e gear r and bushing t at the rear 4 Remove the roller y from the feeding roller assembly Figure 5 889 e rt y q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 110 ...

Page 298: ...o the rear then remove the separation belt assembly 4 Detach the belt from the separation belt assembly 13 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Holding tray Turn the separation roller adjusting roll so that the distance to the shaft is 32 7 0 1 mm Figure 5 891 32 7 0 1mm q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 P...

Page 299: ...ving the Side Guide Plate Assembly 1 Mark the position of the side guide plate with a pencil or the like See Figure 5 901 2 Remove the two mounting screws q and disconnect the two connectors then remove the side guide plate assembly w Figure 5 893 q q w 5 0 0 3mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 112 ...

Page 300: ...ating Motor 1 Remove the side guide plate assembly 2 With the paper jogging guide plate fully open mark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like See Figure 5 900 3 Remove the three mounting screws q and disconnect the connector w then remove the rear guide plate assembly e Figure 5 895 q q w e q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 ...

Page 301: ...g guide plate fully open mark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like 3 Remove the three mounting screws q and disconnect the connector w then remove the front guide plate assembly e Figure 5 897 q w e q r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 114 ...

Page 302: ... 4 898 5 Remove the two mounting screws y two grip rings u and spring pin i then remove the solenoid o Figure 5 899 y u i o r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 115 ...

Page 303: ...all the plate in its initial position Figure 5 900 20 Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate Assembly Mark the position of the side guide plate assembly with a scribe and install it along the marking Figure 5 901 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 116 ...

Page 304: ...he timing belt to the pulley Figure 5 902 22 Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid When installing the solenoid position it so that the stroke distance between rubber silencer and solenoid edge is 1 5 0 3 mm Figure 5 903 1 5 0 3mm A COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 117 ...

Page 305: ...he three mounting screws q and remove the holding tray feeding assembly front cover w Figure 5 904 3 Remove the five mounting screws e and two metal fixings r and detach the holding tray feeding assembly t from the rail Figure 5 905 e e e e e r r t q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 118 ...

Page 306: ...ay feeding assembly upper guide more than it opens freely or the stopper r will be damaged 3 Remove the two mounting screws and disconnect the connector then remove the sensor assembly from the holding tray feeding assembly When installing the holding tray feeding assembly sensor cover be sure to fit the two springs into the bosses behind the holding tray feeding assembly upper guide q we r COPYRI...

Page 307: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 120 ...

Page 308: ...ism for the Upper Separation Claw 6 11 F SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater 6 12 G Locking Operation fixing feeding unit 6 14 H Error Detection Circuit 6 15 II DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 6 18 A Fixing Assembly 6 19 B Delivery Assembly 6 36 This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and i...

Page 309: ...ode on the control panel when the fixing web drive solenoid SL14 has operated 250 000 times The cumulative count of how many times the fixing web drive solenoid has operated can be checked in service mode 6 WEB The cleaning belt detecting lever remains in direct contact with the cleaning belt and shifts as the cleaning belt is taken up causing the control panel to indicate E005 when it blocks the ...

Page 310: ...for small size copy Reference 1 Heater 120 V model 790 W main 410 W sub 220 240 V model 1200 W main 2 Thermal switch 240 10 C COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 2 ...

Page 311: ...ly inlet guide is varied by turning on and off the fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid SL16 so as to facilitate feeding of copy paper The height is varied according to the following conditions and the change is made with reference to a height of about 130 mm at start of copying and upon end of rotation High if the copy paper is B5R or longer including B5R Low if the copy paper is shorter th...

Page 312: ...l delivery detection signal EXDPD Internal delivery paper detection signal IDPD Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal DPDSD PS10 Cleaning belt take up arm DC controller PCB PS12 Fixing assembly inlet guide SL16 Upper fixing roller Lower fixing roller Delivery paper deflecting plate Drive solenoid Fixing cleaning belt To holding tray COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV ...

Page 313: ...heck for an abnormal increase in temperature Figure 6 102 Upper fixing roller Fixing lower roller PS47 Fixing assembly outlet paper detection signal FXDEL Fixing assembly inlet paper detection signal FXCJS Cleaning belt length detection signal CBOP Main thermistor signal TH1 Main heater drive signal MHRD Sub heater drive signal SHRD Main thermistor TH1 AC power supply TPI Cleaning belt guide plate...

Page 314: ...ried in user mode l Control Temperature during Pre Heat Period between another press on the Pre Heat key and the start of STBY Table 6 103 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 6 Mode Internal Control temperature temperature Standby Copying H mode 17 C or more 200 C 205 C M mode 12 to 17 C 210 C 212 C L mode 12 C or...

Page 315: ...erature of the fixing roller is as shown in Table 6 104 as detected by the main thermistor TH1 Table 6 104 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 7 Down Condition 60 min after 60 min and later sequence power on after power on 50 cpm recovery 170 C 175 C mode 40 cpm mode 165 C 170 C 35 cpm mode 160 C 165 C Copying sto...

Page 316: ...n the machine starts WMUP sequence while indicating the remaining number of copies on the control panel When the Copy Start key is pressed as in auto start or during STBY the remaining number of copies are made Figure 6 103 210 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 205 C 195 C 210 C 200 C 212 C 205 C 210 C 200 C Mode H 17 C Mode M L 12 C 17 C 12 C Power switch SWON WMUP Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 Main motor M1 Wa...

Page 317: ... min Copy Start key ON Pre Heat key ON Auto shut off ON ON Flashing 210 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 180 C 155 C 110 C 10 saving 25 saving 50 saving 1 May be varied in service mode Mode H 17 C Mode M L 12 C 17 C 12 C COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 9 ...

Page 318: ...er fixing roller over a distance of 12 mm The reciprocating cam is supplied with drive by the cleaning belt drive solenoid SL14 through a one way arm Figure 6 105 Upper fixing roller Reciprocating cam One way arm Fixing assembly cleaning belt drive solenoid SL14 Thermistor TH1 12mm Thermistor COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 F...

Page 319: ... claw is slid back and forth in the axial direction of the upper fixing roller over a distance of 3 mm Figure 6 106 Upper fixing roller Separation claw Separation claw Reciprocating cam Internal delivery roller Main motor M1 3mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 11 ...

Page 320: ... detection signal MHOND is 0 when the CPU on the DC controller PCB is generating the fixing main heater drive signal MHRD i e CPU detection w the DC controller will identify an error in SSR and issue an E code To cut off the power to the AC circuit the DC controller causes the power switch OFF signal PWOFF to go 0 When the power switch is turned off the power to the heater will be cut off however ...

Page 321: ... JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 13 Figure 6 107 q w Power switch SW1 Power supply PCB 12V DC controller PCB Gate array Gate array MHOND Q641 AC driver PCB CPU PWOFF FDOD MSWA PC1 FFURLS SSRON Q643 5V Main heater H1 Rectifier circuit Front door switch SW2 ...

Page 322: ... the foregoing design the holding tray unit will also slide out when the fixing feeding unit is drawn out for removal of the jam thereby preventing tearing the copy paper over two units This locking mechanism is released during initial rotation of the main motor after jam removal Figure 6 108 Fixing feeding assembly Holding tray assembly Locking lever Spring clutch M1 Fixing feeding unit locking s...

Page 323: ... presence absence of an error and communicates the result to the master CPU Figure 6 109 2 Scanning Lamp Error Activation Detection Circuit The gate array receives the scanning lamp ON signal CVRON and the scanning lamp ON detection signal CVR ACTIVE If the scanning lamp is on in the absence of the scanning lamp ON signal the gate array will identify an error At this time the gate array will commu...

Page 324: ...xing roller generates the error signal FUSER TEMP ERROR to the gate array The gate array will also turn off the power switch in response to an abnormal increase in the surface temperature of the fixing roller When the power supply switch OFF signal is generated the relay inside the power switch is powered to turn off the power switch and the AC power supply If the fixing sub thermistor TH2 detects...

Page 325: ...controller PCB M3 M3 M3 drive circuit M3 drive circuit PS4 To RDF Detection circuit Gate array Resetting IC Master CPU ENCODER ERROR Resetting Error DC controller PCB Gate array Overheating detected H1 H1 H2 TH1 TH2 Master CPU AC driver PCB AC driver PCB Timer Main heater ON Sub heater ON Main Sub SSR ON SSR ACTIVE FUSER TEMP ERROR 100 120V 220 240V Power supply switch OFF Overheating open circuit...

Page 326: ...4 One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to protect against static electricity Do not leave it out during assembly work 5 The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity Do not leave them out during assembly work 6 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 7 Before ...

Page 327: ...ing upper unit e Lower roller w Upper roller Figure 6 201 2 Locking Mechanism Figure 6 202 Fulcrum Locking arm q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 19 ...

Page 328: ...m the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding front cover 3 Remove the mounting screw q and remove the fixing upper cover w Figure 6 204 q w Take up roller Feeding roller COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 20 ...

Page 329: ...ove the cleaning belt feeding roller t and the cleaning belt take up roller y by pushing them toward the rear Figure 6 206 Be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan found under the cleaning belt feeding roller t y e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 21 Caution ...

Page 330: ...eck to make sure that the fixing cleaning belt is not wound askew or it is not slack or wrinkled In addition make sure that the direction of winding and the orientation are as shown in Figure 6 203 2 After installing the fixing cleaning belt move the one way lever e in the direction of the arrow Figure 6 208 then turn it until all the slack has been removed from the fixing cleaning belt Figure 6 2...

Page 331: ...xing upper cover 4 Open the fixing delivery assembly q Figure 6 209 5 Remove the two mounting screws w and remove the flywheel mount e Figure 6 210 6 Remove the E ring r and remove the flywheel t Figure 6 211 r t w e q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 23 ...

Page 332: ...6 212 8 Open the fixing upper unit o slightly and remove it by lifting it to the left then place it on a desk The silicone oil in the silicone oil pan can start to drip during the work if possible drain it in advance Figure 6 213 o y u i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 24 Caution ...

Page 333: ...d remove the fixing upper unit 6 Remove the faston q at the front of the heater main heater sub heater 7 Remove the mounting screw w and remove the side electrode supply leaf spring e at the front 8 Free the two cables r at the front of the heater from the wire saddles t Figure 6 214 9 Remove the two fastons y at the rear Figure 6 215 y q w e r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 ...

Page 334: ... plate of the upper fixing unit to push down the height adjusting support plate of the fixing assembly inlet guide lowering the fixing assembly inlet guide Since such a condition will lead to jamming of copy paper make sure not to open the fixing assembly upper unit with force COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 2...

Page 335: ... Fixing Upper Roller 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding assembly front cover 3 Open the fixing delivery assembly 4 Remove the flywheel 5 Remove the fixing upper cover and remove the fixing cleaning belt then clean the silicone oil pan and remove the fixing upper unit 6 Remove the main heater and the sub heater 7 Remove the two mounting screws w used to ...

Page 336: ...igure 6 218a front 10 While paying attention to the thermistor and the thermal switch remove the upper roller unit y Figure 6 219 y t t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 28 ...

Page 337: ...he steps used to remove it Handling the Upper Roller If possible wrap the roller with copy paper so as to protect its surface from dirt and scratches Installing the Upper Roller a Orient it so that the side with a longer cut off section A in Figure 6 221 is toward the rear Figure 6 221 b Be sure to install the collars q w of the bushing in the correct order shown in Figure 6 221a Figure 6 221a q w...

Page 338: ...bly holder t 7 Remove the four mounting screws y and remove the thermal switch assembly Figure 6 222 8 Remove the two mounting screws and remove the thermal switch 11 Removing the Main Thermistor TH1 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding assembly front cover 3 Remove the fixing assembly upper cover 4 Remove the web 5 Remove the mounting screw q and remove ...

Page 339: ...e copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding assembly front cover 3 Remove the flywheel 4 Remove the fixing assembly upper cover 5 Remove the fixing cleaning belt clean the silicone oil pan then remove the fixing assembly upper unit 6 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the lower separation claw assembly 2 together with its support plate w Figure 6 226 q q w t y y u e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CA...

Page 340: ...mbly of the fixing assembly 6 Remove the lower separation claw support plate 7 Remove the lower roller q from the fixing assembly remove the two E rings w from the lower roller and remove the two bearings e Figure 6 227 14 Removing the Upper Separation Claw 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Open the fixing delivery assembly and release the spring q then remove the upper separat...

Page 341: ...f A4 then perform the following to measure the nip 1 Place A3 paper and select A3 2 Open the copyboard cover 3 Start service mode 4 using the key select NIP in nip measurement mode 4 Press the key user mode The machine will pick up paper and will be ready for measurement Reference The paper will be stopped halfway once it will then be automatically discharged in about 10 sec 5 Measure the nip Feed...

Page 342: ...utch by turning the set screw e so that the gap between the 41T gear q and the control ring w is 0 1 to 0 3 mm equivalent of four sheets of 64 g m2 plain paper Figure 6 230 q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 34 ...

Page 343: ...nd remove the harness cover e Figure 6 231 3 Remove the screw y and remove the sub thermistor unit t Figure 6 232 The sub thermistor cannot be replaced in the field Replace it as part of the sub thermistor unit t shown in Figure 6 232 y t t q e w r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 35 Caution ...

Page 344: ... to the front and out of the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding assembly front cover 3 Remove the mounting screw q and pull out the pin w then remove the delivery upper guide e Figure 6 234 q w e Delivery upper guide fixing delivery assembly COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 36 ...

Page 345: ...ng feeding locking assembly r Figure 6 235 4 Removing the External Delivery Roller 1 Slide the fixing feeding assembly unit to the front and out of the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding assembly front cover 3 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the delivery roller guide w Figure 6 236 q q w q w e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JA...

Page 346: ...r t and bushing y at the front 6 Remove the E ring u and the bushing i at the rear and remove the external delivery roller o Figure 6 237 front Figure 6 237a rear u i e e r t y o COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 38 ...

Page 347: ...nsor Assembly 1 Slide the fixing feeding unit to the front then remove the front over and the fixing assembly upper unit See p 6 23 2 Remove the fixing assembly lower separation claw assembly See p 6 31 3 Remove the mounting screw q and slide the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor assembly w to the right then disconnect the connector e J108 and remove the sensor Figure 6 239 q w e q w COPYRIGHT 1...

Page 348: ...law assembly See p 6 31 5 Remove the E ring q gear w and parallel pin e at the front 6 Remove the E ring r and the bushing t Figure 6 240 7 Remove the E ring y and the gear u at the rear 8 Remove the E ring i and the bushing o Figure 6 241 9 Remove the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor assembly See p 6 39 10 Remove the internal delivery roller y u i o q we r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP63...

Page 349: ... Waste Toner Drive Assembly 7 35 H Main Drive Assembly drum developing 7 38 I Vertical Path Drive Assembly 7 40 J Pick Up Drive Assembly 7 42 K Duplexing Drive 1 Assembly 7 44 L Lifter Drive Assembly 7 46 M Cassette Pick Up Drive Assembly 7 48 N Attaching the Drive Belt 7 50 O DC Controller PCB 7 51 P DC Power Supply Assembly 7 52 Q High Voltage Transformer Assembly 7 53 R Power Supply Inlet Assem...

Page 350: ...t B Operation 1 Data Communication The control panel controller PCB communicates with the copier s image processor PCB through an interface unit to exchange data in serial mode The communication is controlled by the microprocessor on the control panel controller PCB Figure 7 101 LCD panel Input key VR911 display LED Control panel controller PCB DC controller PCB Display memory LCD controller Inter...

Page 351: ...troller also turns on and off various instructions according to programs The LCD controller also serves to write display text codes into display RAM as necessary the display RAM data is then sent to the display panel in response to the timing signals generated by the LCD controller COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AU...

Page 352: ...mn driver Column driver Column driver Column driver LCD panel Key control panel LED display Touch panel Control panel controller PCB DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 3 ...

Page 353: ... The LCD contrast remains constant free of the influence of ambient temperature once it is set by the contrast adjusting knob on the control panel Figure 7 103 If the temperature around the control panel rises the resistance of the thermistor will lower thereby increasing the voltage Vo supplied to the LCD unit If the temperature around the control panel lowers on the other hand the resistance of ...

Page 354: ...causes electrical continuity thereby connecting a pair of electrodes so that the corresponding X Y coordinates are obtained as in the case of a common key matrix In other words the correspondence between key scan signals from the control panel controller circuit and the input signals to the control panel controller circuit enables the control panel controller PCB to identify which key has been pre...

Page 355: ... 7 201 shows the function of each fan and the filter used and the orientation of the fan while Table 7 203 shows when each fan turns on Figure 7 201 FM8 FM5 FM7 FM6 FM3 FM2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 6 ...

Page 356: ...n COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 7 Notation FM2 FM3 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 Name Exhaust fan Fixing assembly heat exhaust fan Developing fan Feeding fan Cleaner fan Scanner cooling fan Orientation Blowing Drawing Drawing Drawing Drawing Blowing Filter Ozone Air dust proofing Function Discharges exhau...

Page 357: ...7 8 Power switch ON Developing fan FM5 Scanner cooling fan FM8 Fixing heat exhaust fan FM3 Exhaust fan FM2 Cleaner fan FM7 Feeding fan FM6 WMUP INTR CNTR LSTR WMUPR STBY INTR CNTR AER SCFW SCRVSCFW SCRV LSTR STBY 15 min 10 min 10 min Copy Start key ON Power switch OFF Power switch Half speed rotation Figure 7 203 Sequence of Operations ...

Page 358: ...ower switch SW2 Front door switch SW3 Drum heater switch SW4 High voltage multifeeder door switch DC power supply PCB 38 VU power supply circuit 24 VU power supply circuit 24 VR power supply circuit 24 VH power supply circuit 5 VR power supply circuit 12 VU power supply circuit 24 VA1 power supply circuit 24 VA2 power supply circuit RL401 Fixing heater Scanning lamp Lamp regulator Pick up motor co...

Page 359: ...er switch SW1 line b thereby turning on the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB thereafter the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB causes the remote signal RMT to go 1 turning on the relay RL401 so that the AC input line will switch to the AC direct input line a The 38VU 24VU 24VR 24VA2 and 24VH circuits turn off when the power switch SW1 is turned off other DC power circuits however remai...

Page 360: ...r plug connected Power switch ON Power switch OFF Power plug disconnected 15 min Remote signal RTM 38VU output timing 24VU output timing 24VR output timing 24VA1 output timing 24VA2 output timing 5VR output timing 12VU output timing 24VU1 output timing 24VU2 output timing COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY ME...

Page 361: ...ped with a lithium battery to back up the data when the power plug is disconnected The lithium battery is designed to last for about five years with the power plug disconnected The date time indication stops when its life ends and the indication starts once again when the power plug is connected The lithium battery cannot be re charged requiring replacement available as a service part which will l...

Page 362: ...the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to protect against static electricity Do not leave it out during assembly work 5 The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity Do not leave them out during assembly work 6 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 7 Before sliding o...

Page 363: ...r 2 i Lower left cover 7 Figure 7 401 q Inside upper cover 2 r Power switch assembly cover 3 w Fixing feeding assembly front cover 3 t Hopper cover e Connector cover 1 Figure 7 402 q w e r t w e t q r u y i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 14 ...

Page 364: ...ws on their own are omitted from the discussions 1 Removing the Front Door 1 Open the front door and remove the mounting screw w of the stopper tape q then remove the two stoppers e Figure 7 403 2 Pull out the pin r Figure 7 404 r q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 15 ...

Page 365: ...door and shift the fixing feeding assembly lever then slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the three mounting screw q and remove the inside upper cover w Figure 7 406 w q t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 16 ...

Page 366: ...inside of the fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the mounting screw e and remove the fixing knob r 4 Remove the three mounting screws t and remove the fixing feeding assembly front cover y Figure 7 407 4 Removing the Rear Cover 1 Remove the nine mounting screws q and remove the rear cover w Figure 7 408 q q q w q q q w er t t t y COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED I...

Page 367: ...e installing the hopper assembly 6 Removing the Process Unit 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the developing assembly See p 4 60 3 Remove the hopper assembly See p 4 66 4 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly and place the drum protection sheet on the registration roller assembly 5 Disconnect the four connectors q and remove the two mounting screws w Figure 7 410 q w w q w e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON I...

Page 368: ... cleaning blade will be displaced in relation to the drum causing cleaning faults Be sure to fix the drum in place before removing the drum fixing screw Reference If you merely want to release the hopper assembly without removing it open the multifeeder door and the upper right door to allow for space in the front Figure 7 411 t e r Drum shaft COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JUL...

Page 369: ...stops Figure 7 412 8 Hold the process unit as shown and remove it Figure 4 413 Right hand Left hand y COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 20 ...

Page 370: ...ce the process unit on the L shaped stay Figure 7 414 rail side 2 After inserting the process unit into the copier match the cut in of the drum shaft and the cut in of the drum using the drum rotating tool e then insert the drum fixing tool t and fit the mounting screw r into the center hole of the drum to fix it in place Figure 7 415 e r t q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY...

Page 371: ...andard white cover 2 Open the RDF then remove the three mounting screws q and the three RDF catch metal fixings w Figure 7 416 3 Remove the three screws e and remove the upper right cover r Figure 7 417 e r w w q q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 22 ...

Page 372: ...the connector cover u and disconnect the connector and open the hopper i Figure 7 419 Check to make sure that the connector is connected before installing the hopper assembly u i y t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 23 Caution ...

Page 373: ...ng feeding assembly 0 Figure 7 420 7 Remove the three mounting screws 1 and remove the inside upper cover 2 then slide in the fixing feeding assembly Figure 7 421 11 12 o 10 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 24 ...

Page 374: ...the copier Figure 7 422 9 Disconnect the three connectors J911 J915 J955 2 Removing the Control Panel PCB 1 Remove the four mounting screws q and shift the back cover w to the right to remove Figure 7 423 q w 13 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 25 Caution ...

Page 375: ...bles e J912 J913 J916 on the control panel CPU PCBl and disconnect the connector r J956 of the inverter PCB 3 Remove the five mounting screws t and remove the touch panel Figure 7 425 e r t t y q q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 26 ...

Page 376: ...el right support plate w and the control panel controller CPU PCB e Figure 7 426 2 Remove the 13 mounting screws r and remove the numeric keypad t Figure 7 427 r t q q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 27 ...

Page 377: ...the door switch assembly w Figure 7 428 2 Removing the Multifeeder Door Switch Assembly 1 Remove the front door and remove the hopper assembly 2 Remove the three mounting screws q and remove the power supply switch assembly cover w Figure 7 429 q w q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 28 ...

Page 378: ...4 Remove the sensor from the multifeeder door sensor multifeeder door catch assembly 3 Installing the Drum Heater Switch Install the switch so that its right side is in ON position e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 29 ...

Page 379: ... mounting screws e and disconnect the connector r then remove the scanner cooling fan unit t together with the potential control PCB Figure 7 431 2 Removing the Exhaust Fan 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the two mounting screws q and disconnect the connector w then remove the exhaust fan e Figure 7 432 q w e e e e q w r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JA...

Page 380: ...433 4 Removing the Developing Fan 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector J301 q of the high voltage transferor PCB then remove the three mounting screws w and shift the high voltage transformer assembly e Figure 7 434 q w e q q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 31 ...

Page 381: ...cover 2 Remove the three mounting screws and shift the high voltage transformer PCB 3 Remove the two mounting screws q and disconnect the connector w then remove the developing fan assembly e Figure 7 436 q w e r r t y COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 32 ...

Page 382: ...gure 7 437 E Removing the Counter Assembly 1 Open the front door and remove the inside upper cover then remove the mounting screws from the control panel 2 Remove the mounting screw q and disconnect the two connectors w then remove the counter assembly e together with the support plate Figure 7 438 q w w e q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME ...

Page 383: ...e spring q and loosen the tension pulley then remove the four mounting screws w detach the belt from the end of the main motor and remove the main motor e Figure 7 439 q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 34 ...

Page 384: ... Waste Toner Drive Assembly 1 Open the front door and draw out the process unit the fixing feeding unit and the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the high voltage transformer PCB 4 Remove the cleaner fan and the feeding fan 5 Remove the waste toner bottle COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ...

Page 385: ...t the holding tray assembly drawer connector t Figure 7 442 8 Remove the mounting screw y of the DC controller PCB and disconnect the three connectors u J113 J114 J115 and the two relay connectors i r t q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 36 ...

Page 386: ...oner will start to pour out of the end of the waste toner pipe when the fixing waste toner drive assembly is removed Be sure to stop up the end with a ball of paper to prevent it Figure 7 444 o o o 10 y u i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 37 Caution ...

Page 387: ... from the copier 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the high voltage PCB and the high voltage transformer assembly 4 Remove the waste toner bottle 5 Remove the cleaner fan feeding fan and developing fan 6 Remove the fixing waste toner drive assembly COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 38 ...

Page 388: ...s guide 1 w Figure 7 446 8 Remove the seven mounting screws e and remove the main drive unit r Figure 7 447 e e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 39 ...

Page 389: ...over 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the waste toner bottle 4 Remove the five mounting screws q and remove the rear right grip assembly w Figure 7 449 q w q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 40 ...

Page 390: ...ottle support plate r Figure 7 450 6 Remove the two mounting screws t and remove the harness guide 2 y Figure 7 451 t y e e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 41 ...

Page 391: ...ors i then remove the vertical path drive assembly o Figure 7 452 J Pick Up Drive Assembly 1 Construction Figure 7 453 i o u u COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 42 ...

Page 392: ...bly 4 Remove the waste toner bottle 5 Remove the cleaner fan feeding fan and developing fan 6 Remove the fixing waste toner drive assembly 7 Free the harness guide 1 See Figure 7 446 8 Detach the timing belt 9 Remove the two mounting screws q and remove the deck relay drive assembly w Figure 7 454 q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CH...

Page 393: ...ctors r then remove the pick up drive assembly Figure 7 455 K Duplexing Drive 1 Assembly 1 Construction Figure 7 456 e e e e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 44 ...

Page 394: ...ve the DC controller PCB 4 Remove the spring q of the tensioner and detach the timing belt 5 Remove the four mounting screws w and remove the duplexing drive 1 assembly e Figure 7 457 q w w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 45 ...

Page 395: ...ier 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the waste toner bottle 4 Remove the rear right grip assembly 5 Remove the three mounting screws q and remove the waste toner bottle support plate w Figure 7 459 q q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 46 ...

Page 396: ... and remove the three screws r then remove the lifter drive assembly t Figure 7 460 e r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 47 ...

Page 397: ...he copier 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the waste toner bottle 4 Remove the waste toner bottle support plate 5 Remove the rear right bottle support plate 6 Remove the DC controller PCB and detach the timing belt COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 48 ...

Page 398: ...hen disconnect the connector w Figure 7 462 8 Remove the five mounting screws e and remove the cassette pick up drive assembly r Figure 7 463 e e e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 49 ...

Page 399: ...rive belt and the pick up drive belt is on the roller above outer side the pick up drive belt Registration feeding drive belt Drum drive belt Main motor Fixing waste toner drive belt Pick up motor Holding tray drive belt Pick up drive belt COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 50 Caution ...

Page 400: ...nals will lead to overheating 2 Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB When sending the DC controller PCB to the workshop or the factory put it in a conducting bag intact with its mount Use a conducting bag whose one side is transparent and make sure that the face of the PCB shows through After replacement make necessary settings in service mode and user mode Record new service mode s...

Page 401: ...ply protection plate w Figure 7 466 3 Disconnect the nine connectors J303 J304 J305 J306 J308 J309 J311 J312 AC relay connector 4 Remove the two mounting screws e and remove the DC power supply PCB r together with its mount Figure 7 467 e e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 52 ...

Page 402: ...ove the three mounting screws w and remove the PCB e Figure 7 468 4 Remove the two fastons r and disconnect the connector t then remove the two mounting screws y and remove the transformer assembly u Figure 7 469 r t y y u q w w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 53 ...

Page 403: ...e lower left cover 3 Remove the four mounting screws q 4 Disconnect the four connectors w and remove the power supply cord mount e Figure 7 470 q q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7 54 ...

Page 404: ...ich each part operates Note that the Paper Deck A1 is referred to as side paper deck so as to distinguish it from the copier s front paper deck I SIDE PAPER DECK 8 1 A Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver 8 1 B Pick Up 8 4 C Detection of Paper for the Deck 8 7 D Deck Lifter 8 8 E Opening Closing the Deck compartment 8 11 F Controlling the Deck Motor 8 13 II DETECTING JAMS 8 17 A Outline...

Page 405: ...8 7 When Q106 has detected paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at Q106 DVPD J16 1 2 3 5VR Q106 J3B 12 11 10 When Q107 has detected copy paper 1 When the light blocking plate is at Q107 DPPD J17 1 2 3 J107 3 2 1 J107 8 7 6 J107 14 13 12 5VR Q107 J3A 3 2 1 When paper is absent in the deck 1 When the light blocking plate is not at Q108 DPE J19 1 2 3 5VR 5VR Q108 J3A 8 7 6 J3A 14 13 12 When the l...

Page 406: ...103 J102 1 2 J8 5 4 OPEN switch PCB DOLON DOPD DLLD DOPN When the LED is ON 0 The LEDs flash while the deck lifter motor is rotating When the deck is open 1 SW102 is not pressed When the deck is at the lower limit 1 When SW103 is not pressed When SW101 is pressed to open the deck 0 NO NC 0VU 0VR Power supply 38VU 5VR Side deck driver PCB COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997...

Page 407: ... Deck vertical path clutch CL101 24VU DVPCD When 0 CL101 goes ON J12 1 2 J3B 6 5 Deck pick up clutch CL102 24VU DPUCD When 0 CL102 goes ON J13 1 2 J3B 14 13 When 0 SL101 goes ON DPRSD 24VU Deck pick up roller releasing solenoid SL101 J18 1 2 J107 5 4 J3A 5 4 When 0 SL102 goes ON DOPSD 24VU Deck OPEN solenoid SL102 J111 2 1 J103 2 1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINT...

Page 408: ...to pick up copy paper At this time the feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of copy paper is fed thereafter the deck pick up roller releasing solenoid SL101 turns on as soon as the deck paper sensor Q107 detects copy paper thereby moving the pick up roller to move away from the surface of the copy paper The deck vertical path roller starts to rotate when ...

Page 409: ... detection signal DVPD Deck pick up guide OPEN signal DPUGO Deck vertical path clutch drive command DVPCD Deck pick up clutch drive command DPUCD Deck pick up roller releasing solenoid drive command DPRSD Deck main motor drive command COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 5 ...

Page 410: ...N Deck main motor M101 Deck pick up clutch CL102 Deck pick up roller releasing solenoid SL101 Deck pick up sensor Q107 Deck vertical path sensor Q106 Deck vertical path clutch CL101 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 6 ...

Page 411: ...ge Figure 8 105a paper present Figure 8 105b paper absent 2 Changing the Paper Size for the Deck To change the paper size for the deck at time of machine installation or to comply with the user s request shift the guide plate inside the deck to suit the copy paper and enter the paper size in service mode 5 SDK_SZ Lifter Deck paper OUT sensor Paper detecting lever Deck paper OUT sensor Paper detect...

Page 412: ...ifter position sensor a deck lifter upper limit sensor Q102 is provided to prevent damage to the deck The lifter starts to move down when the deck OPEN switch SW100 is pressed and stops when it leaves the sensor lever of the deck paper supply position sensor Q103 i e the falling edge of the sensor signal When copy paper has been supplied in this position the lever of the deck paper supply position...

Page 413: ...ply position sensor Q103 Deck lifter position sensor Q110 Deck lifter cable Deck lifter upper limit sensor Q102 Deck OPEN switch SW100 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW103 Deck feed roller Deck separation roller COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 9 ...

Page 414: ...er When copy paper starts to run out and the lifter moves up to pick up position the area of the black belt inside the display window increases and the level of copy paper white area starts to decrease indicating the remaining level of copy paper Figure 8 107 M102 Black belt Rack Indicator window Deck lifter motor Deck front cover Coupling Drive belt Lifter lowers and paper level white area increa...

Page 415: ...ion When the deck lifter motor rotates to open close the deck the Deck Open indicator LED100 on the OPEN switch PCB starts to flash Figure 8 108 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal DLLD J8 5 J11 3 J2001A 1 Deck lifter motor drive command J6 1 2 J11 J2001A M102 DC Controller PCB Side deck driver PCB Deck lifter Deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL Deck OPEN detection signal DOPD Deck ...

Page 416: ...supply position sensor Q103 Deck OPEN detecting switch SW102 Deck OPEN solenoid SL102 Deck lifter position sensor Q110 Deck lifter DOWN Deck lifter UP Compartment SET Varies according to the level of the stack Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW103 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 12 ...

Page 417: ...hand the motor drive circuit turns off to stop the motor The copier s DC controller monitors the speed of rotation of the motor in reference to the deck main motor clock pulse signal DMFG if the pulse signal stops for a specific period 1 4 sec during initial rotation 2 8 sec during normal copying the DC controller will indicate E043 on the copier s controller Figure 8 110 Deck main motor driver PC...

Page 418: ...e pick up feeding speed When installing the deck to the copier check to make sure that both bits of the DIP switch are at ON deck main motor high speed signal DMHS 0 otherwise the wrong pick up feeding speed will be selected causing jams COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 14 ...

Page 419: ... and on the copier to reset q Conditions for Moving Up the Lifter The deck compartment is closed i e the deck OPEN detection signal DOPD is 0 The deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL is 0 and further the deck lifter position detection signal DLPD is 0 The deck lifter motor drive signal DLMON is 0 The deck lifter UP signal DLUP is 0 As a result the lifter starts to move up w Conditions for...

Page 420: ...tch SW102 Deck lifter position sensor Q110 Deck lifter motor drive signal DLMON Deck lifter UP signal DLUP Deck paper supply position detection signal DPSP Deck OPEN detection signal DOPD Deck lifter motor UP drive signal Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal Deck OPEN signal DOPN Deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL Deck OPEN detection signal DLPD Deck lifter lower limit detection signal D...

Page 421: ...pier s microprocessor identifies a jam it discharges all sheets moving ahead of the jam and then stops the machine Thereafter the DC controller will show instructions on how to remove the jam on the copier s jam Figure 8 201 Table 8 201 Q106 Q107 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 17 Notation Name Function Q106 D...

Page 422: ...ndicator PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW Jam check Deck pick up sensor Q107 Deck vertical path sensor Q106 Deck main motor M101 Normal Error I I Varies according to length of paper Deck pick up vertical path jam check Copy Start key ON Jam indicator PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW Deck pick up clutch CL102 Jam check Deck pick up sensor Q107 Deck vertical path sensor Q106 Deck main motor M101 Normal Error COPYRIGHT 1997...

Page 423: ...4 One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to protect against static electricity Do not leave it out during assembly work 5 The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity Do not leave them out during assembly work 6 As a rule do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed 7 Before ...

Page 424: ...TED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 20 q Vertical path cover front w Vertical path unit cove e Vertical path assembly opening closing grip r Vertical path cover rear t Rear cover y Upper cover u Right cover i Front cover o Compartment opening closing switch 0 Upper front cover 1 Deck releasing grip ...

Page 425: ...e compartment with a finger to open the compartment Figure 8 301 2 Loosen the four screws e and remove the front cover r of the deck toward the front Figure 8 302 e r rear q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 21 ...

Page 426: ...ligned Figure 8 303 Install the front cover so that the gap between the front cover and the upper front cover is 3 1 mm Figure 8 303a 3 1m m Upper front cover Front cover Aligned COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 22 Caution Caution ...

Page 427: ... arrow Figure 8 304 increasing the white area before installing the front cover If the deck is driven while there is a discrepancy between the paper level indicator and the deck lifter the drive system for the paper level indicator can become damaged Figure 8 304 front view Indicator window Deck front cover Drive belt Paper level white area increasing COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 R...

Page 428: ...ar cover w 2 Holding the vertical path assembly opening closing grip open the deck vertical path assembly 3 Remove the two screws e and remove the vertical path cover rear r Figure 8 305 q e r q w q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 24 ...

Page 429: ...q with a finger to open the compartment q Figure 8 306 3 Remove the three screws e and shift the right cover r in the direction of the arrow Figure 8 307 to remove Figure 8 307 e r rear q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 25 ...

Page 430: ...w of the compartment q to open the compartment Figure 8 308 3 Remove the three screws e and disconnect the connector r then remove the upper front cover t Figure 8 309 e r t rear q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 26 ...

Page 431: ... and remove the two screws y then move the upper cover u in the direction of the arrow Figure 8 310 Figure 8 310 y u COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 27 ...

Page 432: ...emove the right cover See p 8 25 3 As shown match the hole in the deck lower left stay and the hole in the compartment and insert a screwdriver r from inside the compartment to prevent the compartment from closing Figure 8 351 r Lower left stay Compartment left end plate 8 cm approx q w e e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAP...

Page 433: ...igure 8 352 5 Holding the deck as shown Figure 8 353 and place it on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 Figure 8 353 i right side left side t t y u COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 29 ...

Page 434: ... to serve as the base for the deck w Figure 8 354 2 Detach the deck from the copier and push down the latch plate t of the compartment r with a finger to open the compartment Figure 8 355 rear r t 8 cm approx q w e e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 30 ...

Page 435: ...nnect the two connectors 0 then remove the three screws each of the compartment rails 1 left and right and remove the compartment i by lifting it 6 Place the compartment i on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 Figure 8 357 o i 2 0 2 1 rear left of compartment y u i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 31 ...

Page 436: ...sensor lever w of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment q so that the lifter lowers to the lower limit Figure 8 358 3 Remove the screw e and fix the trailing edge guide plate r in position to suit the new paper size 4 Remove the screw t 1 each and fix the left right guide plate y to suit the new paper size Figure 8 359 e r t y q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV ...

Page 437: ... Draw out the compartment and fix the latch plate q of the deck opening solenoid SL102 using the two screws w At this time refer to line e on the latch plate Figure 8 360 rear left of compartment q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 33 ...

Page 438: ... 1 Remove the front cover See p 8 21 2 Slide out the compartment fully and adjust the four mounting screws r on the roll support plate e so that the roll q is about 3 mm from the floor w Figure 8 361 3 m approx q w e r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 34 ...

Page 439: ... pick up clutch e Figure 8 400 2 Removing the Deck Vertical Path Clutch CL101 1 Remove the vertical path cover rear See p 8 24 2 Disconnect the connector q and remove the E ring w then remove the deck vertical path clutch e Figure 8 401 q w e q e w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 35 ...

Page 440: ...ver 2 Disconnect the two connectors q and remove the four screws w and remove the deck main motor e At this time take care not to damage the gear at the end of the motor spindle Figure 8 402 q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 36 ...

Page 441: ...ent and insert a hex wrench r into the hole of the lifter drive shaft e and fix the lifter drive shaft e temporarily in place to prevent it from turning Figure 8 403 Figure 8 404 3 Remove the compartment from the deck See p 8 30 4 Disconnect the two connectors t and remove the five screws y then remove the deck lifter motor unit u Figure 8 405 t y y u 7 c m a p p r o x w e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CAN...

Page 442: ...tment with a finger to lower the lifter until the holes left right in the compartment side plate and the holes left right in the lifter match then insert two screwdrivers to position the lifter Figure 8 406 4 Remove the front cover of the deck See p 8 21 5 Remove the four screws e and remove the roll support plate r Figure 8 407 e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 ...

Page 443: ... 1 and the cable fixing plate 2 then remove the lifter cable 3 on the inside To detach the lifter cable 3 on the inside from the pulley 4 on the inside remove the two set screws 6 on the pulley 5 on the outside and remove the pulley in advance Figure 8 408 t y u 6 0 3 1 2 5 4 o i COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 ...

Page 444: ...ith a finger to lower the lifter until the holes left right in the compartment side plate and the holes in the lifter left right match then insert two screwdrivers w At this time try to keep the top face of the lifter along the line marked on the left side plate of the compartment to facilitate the work Figure 8 409 Line marked q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINT...

Page 445: ...ove the screw t and remove the harness guide y 6 Disconnect the five connectors u and remove the five screws i then remove the metal plate o Figure 8 410 e r t u u y i i i o COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 41 ...

Page 446: ...erform this step the lifter cable will become slack when the lifter unit is removed Figure 8 411 8 Remove the five screws 2 and remove the lifter motor unit 3 Figure 8 412 2 3 2 1 0 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 42 Caution ...

Page 447: ...ulley At this time be sure that the lifter cable is taut until the drivers have been lifted until they stop t of Figure 8 413 5 While keeping the spatial relationship fix the pulley in place to the lifter drive shaft with two set screws y of Figure 8 413 6 After fixing all pulleys that have been removed to the lifter drive shaft measure the distance height from the base plate of the compartment to...

Page 448: ... remove the four screws w 3 Remove the deck pick up unit e Figure 8 450 When installing the deck pick up unit e be sure to tighten the two screws shown in advance Figure 8 451 e Screws q w w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 44 Caution ...

Page 449: ...on of the Deck Pick Up Roller When installing the deck pick up roller check to make sure that the makings on the roller and the side of the collar are as shown in Figure 8 453 q Deck pick up roller e Marking roller w Collar r Marking collar Figure 8 453 Direction of rotation rear q w e r q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PA...

Page 450: ...oward the front Figure 8 454 5 Orientation of the Deck Feeding Roller When installing the deck feeding roller q make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front When installing the feeding roller rubber to the feeding roller shaft make sure that the marking 5 e faces the rear Figure 8 455 w q front e 5 5 q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIM...

Page 451: ...separation roller is initially pink and changes to yellow over time accelerated by exposure to light pink to orange and then to yellow The fact is common to all urethane sponge types and will not affect its physical performance Keep in mind that color difference if any does not indicate different part types Figure 8 456a e q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN...

Page 452: ...ning the Deck Pick Up Roller Releasing Solenoid SL101 Before removing the deck pick up roller releasing solenoid q from the support plate try to remember the position of the two fixing screws w on the solenoid with reference to the scale on the support plate or mark the position on the support plate to identify the position of the solenoid Be sure to fix the solenoid in its initial position whenev...

Page 453: ... remove the four screws w then remove the deck driver PCB e Figure 8 500 2 Removing the OPEN Switch PCB 1 Detach the deck from the copier and push down the latch plate w of the compartment q with a finger to open the compartment Figure 8 501 rear q w q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 49 ...

Page 454: ... r then remove the upper front cover t Figure 8 502 3 Remove the two screws y and remove the OPEN switch PCB u Figure 8 503 y u e r t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK A1 8 50 ...

Page 455: ...mbly 9 18 G Installing the Pick Up Assembly 9 20 H Supplying Toner 9 22 I Connecting the RDF Connector 9 26 J Image Function Checks and User Mode 9 27 III RELOCATING THE MACHINE 9 31 IV INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V 9 32 V INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER A1 9 40 A Setting the Board 9 40 B Installing to the Copier 9 44 C Checking the Operation 9 46 VI INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II ...

Page 456: ...to dust or ammonia gas as necessary provide curtains to protect against direct rays of the sun 4 Be sure that the room is well ventilated the amount of ozone generated by the machine is of a level which is harmless to the health of the people working around it Some nevertheless find the odor not pleasant when working long hours 5 Be sure that none of the feet of the copier is off the floor The mac...

Page 457: ... 102 In general the silicone gas vapors of the silicone oil of the fixing assembly from the copier soils the corona charging wire making the life of the wire shorter This is most conspicuous in a low humidity environment Exhaust Wrong 1 50cm 19 7in min 60cm 23 6in min 50cm 19 7in min 10cm 3 9in min COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPT...

Page 458: ...Figure 9 103 Wrong 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 3 ...

Page 459: ...o prevent the problem If the reading of RHUM inside humidity in service mode 1 is 60 or more turn on the drum heater right of the switch pressed C Shift up the two front adjusters on the bottom of the machine to check to make sure that they are released Take care not to lose the adjusters They can be shaken out while the machine is being moved D Be sure to work in a group of three In particular wh...

Page 460: ...re to hold the stopper so that it faces down otherwise it can slip off while lifting the machine Hold the grips on the pick up side front rear and lift the machine slightly to remove the two pads Then remove the cardboard sheet base plate Hold the grips front rear on the delivery side and lift the machine slightly to remove the two pads Then remove the cardboard sheets base plates Remarks Step 1 2...

Page 461: ...plates out of the skid Turn over the slope plates then match the pin holes in the skid and the pin holes in the slope plates and insert the pins 1 each Hold the grips front rear of the machine and move the machine along the slope plates to the floor Open the cardboard box that comes with the machine and take out the parts and materials Step 5 6 7 8 Remarks Check to make sure that all attachments a...

Page 462: ...HAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 7 Work Remove the packing tape from the machine Open the RDF Remove the scanner fixing packing tape Keep the fixing in store You may need it when relocating the machine in the future Step 1 2 3 Remarks Remove the protective tape from the size index and the protective sheet from the copyboard glass ...

Page 463: ...se to release the transfer separation charging assembly Then slide out the fixing feeding unit to the front Remove the tag and the separation releasing block from the fixing feeding assembly Be sure to remove any foreign matter glue from tape from the feeding belt Remove the tag retaining tape and open the fixing delivery assembly Step 1 2 3 4 Remarks Separation claw releasing block Tag Fixing fee...

Page 464: ...ANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 9 Work Remove the two fixing assembly nip releasing screws Close the fixing delivery assembly Step 5 6 Remarks Screw rear Screw front ...

Page 465: ...ew and remove the metal fixing then disconnect the connector Holding the front and the rear of the transfer separation charging assembly pull the assembly to the front and then pull it to the upper left to remove Using alcohol clean the transfer separation charging assembly Install the transfer separation charging assembly connect the connector Install the metal fixing Be sure to keep the transfer...

Page 466: ...hine Open the multifeeder door and the upper right door and remove the screw from the door tape door stopper of the front door so that the front door will not close the hopper when the hopper is opened Remove the tag tape from the hopper assembly Open the hopper cover and remove the three screws and the connector cover Disconnect the connector and release the hopper assembly Slide out the hopper a...

Page 467: ... charging assembly Using alcohol clean the primary charging assembly Disconnect the connector and remove the screw Then slide out the pre transfer charging assembly Using alcohol clean the pre transfer charging assembly Disconnect the four connectors and remove the two screws You will remove the drum fixing screw in step 12 Free the harness from the edge saddle Connectors Screw Screw Drum fixing s...

Page 468: ...e the photosensitive drum to light for longer than 30 min 3 Do not ever expose the photo sensitive drum to direct rays of the sun 4 Whenever placing the photosen sitive drum or the process unit outside the machine be sure to cover it with six or more sheets of copy paper to protect it against light Slide out the fixing feeding assembly while paying attention to the hopper Place the drum protection...

Page 469: ...th two mounting screws and connect the four connectors Slide the primary charging assembly and the pre transfer charging assembly then fix them in place Put the harness in the edge saddle Install the process unit front cover then close the hopper and connect the connector of the hopper Install the connector covers 3 screws and close the front door Step 15 16 17 18 Remarks 1 Check to make sure that...

Page 470: ...protection sheet when servicing the process unit remove dirt if any keep it together with the drum rotating tool near the waste toner case behind the machine Keep the drum rotating tool in the hole of the grip found above the waste toner case together with the toner case cap Do not roll the drum protection sheet Install the lower rear right cover of the machine Step 19 20 Remarks Waste toner case ...

Page 471: ...HT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 16 Work Open the front door and slide out the fixing feeding assembly then remove the fixing knob releasing lever and fixing feeding cover Remove the E ring and remove the delivery gear white from the machine Replace the gear with the delivery gear attached to the copy tray and install ...

Page 472: ...rm the steps that follow COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 17 Work Remove the two screws and remove the cover from the fixing delivery assembly Remove the screw and remove the two leaf springs w rolls at the center then separate the leaf springs and the roll Fit the roll to the leaf spring that comes with the mac...

Page 473: ...the direction of the arrow rear to remove Take the developing assembly out of the shipping box Check the surface of the cylinder for scratches while turning the developing cylinder gear by hand Holding the center grip pocket of the developing assembly install it to the machine Connect the connector When installing the developing assembly insert it from above so that the developing cylinder will no...

Page 474: ...N CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 19 Work Insert the developing assembly locking unit from the right side rear when it is horizontal insert it to the left side front Fix the developing assembly locking unit with a screw Install the door tape of the multifeeder door with a screw Step 5 6 Remarks Screw ...

Page 475: ...ltifeeder door Shift the lever in the direction of the arrow and remove the pick up roller pressure releasing spacer Slide the right deck cassette halfway out and open the upper right cover and the lower right cover then remove the pick up roller pressure releasing spacer of the right deck cassettes 3 and 4 The illustration shows the paper deck type Reference If the cassette is set the spacer is l...

Page 476: ...topper up Lift the right deck off the machine and onto the floor Slide out the left deck halfway and remove the pressure releasing spacer from the right deck side Push in the left deck Insert the right deck into the machine and install the left right stopper Push in the right deck cassette and close the upper right cover lower right cover and multifeeder Step 3 4 5 6 7 8 Remarks Stopper Spacer ...

Page 477: ... 22 Work Check to find out the orientation left right of the toner bottle mouth Shake the toner bottle ten or more times vigorously Open the hopper cover and fit the boss on the tip of the toner bottle in the groove of the toner supply mouth The toner supply mouth and the toner bottle lock into position Step 1 2 3 Remarks Left Right q w ...

Page 478: ...tter black of the machine on the right side of the toner supply mouth of the hopper pull it to the right Keep pulling until the shutter stops Pull the shutter on the toner bottle side to the right Toner starts to fall from the toner bottle to the hopper tap lightly on the bottom of the toner bottle until all toner has fallen Step 4 5 6 Remarks ...

Page 479: ...NSTALLATION 9 24 Step 7 8 9 Remarks Marking Work Holding the shutter of the toner bottle push it to the left until it stops Holding the shutter on the machine push it to the left until it stops Push the shutter on the machine until it is at ns indicated on the hopper assembly The toner bottle gets unlocked ...

Page 480: ... INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 25 Work Pull the toner bottle in the left upward direction and remove it upward Close the hopper cover Step 10 11 Remarks ...

Page 481: ...97 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 26 Work Remove the face plate of the RDF connector Insert the RDF connector male to the connector female of the machine Step 1 2 Remarks ...

Page 482: ...STMT R Then remove the face sheet from the backing paper and attach it in reference to the front edge of the hole identified by marking A while making sure that the holes identified by markings D F H K and L are fully covered Be sure that the entire sheet is in firm contact Do not cover the hole identified by marking A Do not perform this step if the user is using Inch configured paper Turn on the...

Page 483: ...eriod ends start service mode Press the service switch with a clip through the hole in the inside upper left cover Select TONER S 4 and press the user mode key Check that CHECK THE DEVELOPER is indicated After making sure that the developing assembly is installed press the OK key Press the user mode key Toner is supplied from hopper to develop about 8 to 10 min Press the Reset key twice to leave s...

Page 484: ...ation has ended place the Test Sheet on the copyboard make copies and check the copy images At times toner can fall from the drum separation claws soiling the initial ten or so copies This phenomenon will disappear as copies are made Check to make sure that pick up from each source is normal Make two sided overlay copies Step 11 12 13 14 Remarks Check to make sure that no abnormal sound is heard C...

Page 485: ... and install the door tape door stopper then close the front door Clean up the area around the machine Move the machine to the site of installation and adjust the two adjusters As necessary turn ON the drum heater switch by pushing it on the right side to suit the environment Store away the grip after removing it from the front of the pick up side under the grip of the rear of the pick up side Ins...

Page 486: ...HT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 31 Work Make a copy in Direct Remove all copy paper from the left right paper deck and each cassette Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet Fix the No 2 mirror mount in place with the locking plate from the left cover side Remove the developing ass...

Page 487: ...ws q and three metal fixings w catch for RDF Figure 9 401 2 Remove the three screws e at the front of the upper right cover of the machine Figure 9 402 e w w q q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 32 ...

Page 488: ... the connector and slide out the hopper assembly u to the front and rotate it Figure 9 404 5 Shift the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever i from vertical to horizontal position and slide out the fixing feeding assembly o Figure 9 405 o i u t y r COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 33 ...

Page 489: ... 406 7 Remove the three screws 2 then remove the control panel and turn it over Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the chassis of the machine Figure 9 407 2 0 1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 34 Caution ...

Page 490: ...ol panel PCB cover 4 about 5 mm to the right to remove Figure 9 408 9 Remove the control card inlet face plate 5 Figure 9 409 5 3 4 3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 35 ...

Page 491: ... Figure 9 410 11 Place the sheet 7 over the hole in the control panel display hole of the control card Figure 9 411 7 6 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 36 ...

Page 492: ...d into the control card and fix the control card in place where the card can be slid in and out smoothly Figure 9 412 Further check to make sure that the connector 9 for the printer is centered over the hole Figure 9 413 9 8 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 37 ...

Page 493: ... 415 16 Connect the 4P connector of the machine and the 4P connector of the control card Be sure to lead the harness through the harness retainer so that it will not come into contact with the scanner cable or the drive pulley 1 0 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 38 Caution ...

Page 494: ...16 19 Install the control panel to the machine 20 Install the hopper and the cover to the machine When installing the hopper assembly check to make sure that the connector is connected 21 Turn on the machine and check the operation of the control card 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 39 Caution ...

Page 495: ... the needs of the user 2 1 Set the DIP switch SW1 4 according to the type of copier 2 2 If control by group is desired set the DIP switch SW5 2 according to the control paper size To control AB configuration paper A3 A4 B4 B5 shift it to OFF To control inch configuration paper 11 17 LTR LGL STMT shift it to ON Screw Screw Top cover COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINT...

Page 496: ...ommunication Selects serial communication Selects the use of a central control device Selects normal operation or remote control using commercially available modems RAM clear Selects normal operation For factory use Selects normal operation Selects control of inch configured 11 17 LTR LGL STMT paper Selects AB configured A3 A4 B4 B5 paper Selects service mode operation Selects normal operation Sel...

Page 497: ...fications of the user Fig 9 503 a If you are connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit A1 or a Copy Data Interface Board B1 i e if a Power Supply A1 is necessary Fig 9 504 JB1 JB2 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 JB1 JB2 JA2 JA1 1 6 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU I...

Page 498: ...1 is not necessary Fig 9 505 4 If the user will be using a card reader connect the card reader relay cable to the Copy Data Controller A1 J4 9p Fig 9 506 J4 Card Reader A1 relay cable JA2 JA1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 43 ...

Page 499: ... the correct screws 5 Prepare settings data in advance on a computer at the service station This applies only when remote control is desired 1 Remove the four screws and remove the face plate from the copier s rear cover Fig 9 507 2 Remove the relay postheader from the cable and connect it directly to the connector on the copier s DC controller PCB Fig 9 508 Connector for Card Reader A1 9P Connect...

Page 500: ... copier s DC controller PCB At this time disconnect the relay postheader from the relay cable 4 Fix the Copy Data Controller A1 to the copier s rear cover with four screws Fig 9 509 Screws Screws COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 45 ...

Page 501: ...d is in the groove of the board Fig 9 510 2 Connect the Power Supply A1 to the power plug and check that LED1 on the Copy Data Controller A1 turns on Fig 9 511 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 1 6 LED1 Connector on the Copy Data Controller A1 Connector of the Power Supply A1 Groove of the board COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON IN...

Page 502: ...ch and check that LED1 turns on and LED2 flashes on the Copy Data Controller A1 Make one copy and check that LED3 flashes during copying operation Fig 9 513 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 1 6 LED1 LED3 LED2 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8...

Page 503: ...ig 9 514 6 Connect the connector of the Ten Key Pad A1 to the connector J3 on the Copy Data Controller A1 Fig 9 515 Connector J3 Connector of the Ten Key Pad A1 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 1 6 SW5 3 1 6 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTAL...

Page 504: ...play shows then press the key The display will show Table 9 502 1 Setting the DIP switch SW5 4 on the Copy Data Controller A1 to OFF de selects group control and the display will be as follows Fig 9 517 2 If ID mode has been stored in the copier s memory you can use that ID for the Copy Data Controller A1 To do so operate as follows MANAGE CARD ENT MANAGE ID MANAGE ID ENT MANAGE CARD SW2 1 6 SW4 S...

Page 505: ...4 once again and check that LED5 turns on The copier cannot deliver paper while data is being drawn d Set the DIP switch SW1 on the Copy Data Controller A1 as follows LED5 should go out Table 9 504 Fig 9 518 LED5 SW4 SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 1 6 LED1 LED2 LED3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED I...

Page 506: ... cancels the operation 2 When the display shows press the key 3 The display shows and the cursor flashes for a while to indicate that formatting is under way Then the cursor stops flashing to indicate that 3 has been selected for the mode of control Setting a new mode of control clears such data as the unit price upper limit counter reading and ID Set them again as necessary FORMAT 3_ ENT FORMAT 3...

Page 507: ...y 9 The display shows 10 Press the key 11 The display shows EX2 To change B4 to LGL control paper size 3 1 Press the key so that the display shows 2 Look for the value that represents LGL from Table 9 506 conversion table press q e 3 The display shows 4 Press the key 5 The display shows to indicate the end of the operation 1 You cannot make multiple paper size codes for SIZE1 through 4 2 The count...

Page 508: ...d B1 Copy Data Interface Board A1 or the Remote Diagnostic Unit A1 as an option see the appropriate Installation Procedure S1 S5 SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 SW1 4 SW1 5 SW1 6 SW5 1 SW5 2 SW5 3 SW5 4 SW5 5 SW5 6 indicates that the bit is at ON indicates that the bit is at OFF COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 53 Size B5 FOO...

Page 509: ... the top cover and record the setting of each switch on the label Fig 9 522 Screw Top cover Screw Switch Settings label SW2 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 1 6 SW5 3 1 6 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 54 ...

Page 510: ...t to the RS232C I F connector of Copy Data Controller A1 Fig 9 523 15 End the installation after making sure that no cable is outside of the Copy Data Controller A1 Put the petty pull at the lower right of the copier s rear Fig 9 524 16 Hook the cable connected to the Copy Data Controller A1 on the petty pull 17 Make sure that no cable is trapped by the casters of the copier or the sorter Petty pu...

Page 511: ... copier has been properly installed before starting the work 3 Keep the copier s power cord disconnected during the work 4 Be sure to use the appropriate screws length diameter 5 Make sure the computer in the service station has been properly loaded with the RDD s settings data 1 Remove the two screws w to detach the RDD s top cover q Fig 9 601 w q w COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 RE...

Page 512: ...s connector y as shown Fig 9 602 3 Remove the two screws i and detach the face cover u from the copier s rear cover Fig 9 603 u i i y t COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 57 ...

Page 513: ...ler PCB Fig 9 604 5 Fix the RDD in place on the copier s rear cover with four screws 2 use the screws that come with the RDD Fig 9 605 2 2 Connector J128 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 58 ...

Page 514: ... s PCB shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 6 to ON otherwise shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 to OFF 1 If the ROM IC6 5 is not mounted you need not mount it 2 If you are mounting or replacing the ROM IC6 5 for upgrading the RDD be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 6 to ON LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 4 3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CA...

Page 515: ... SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 15 6 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 60 Switch SW3 1 SW3 2 SW3 3 SW3 4 SW3 5 SW3 6 Setting AII OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF Description selects push pulse for RDD circuit configuration selscts dial pulse for RDD circuit configuration sets dial pulse speed to 20 ...

Page 516: ... that LED5 1 red comes on Table 9 602 Fig 9 611 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 20 9 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 8 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 61 bits on SW2 SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 SW2 4 SW2 5 SW2 ...

Page 517: ...e DIP switch 2 2 on the RDD s PCB to OFF Fig 9 613 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 2 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 20 1 9 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 62 bits on SW2 SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2...

Page 518: ... LED 4 5 red starts to flash upon receipt Fig 9 615 16 Call up the service station to check if the initial settings have been successfully made if the attempt has failed reset the RAM once again starting with step 11 through 13 You must confirm that the RDD s settings are correct by calling the service station LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 5 LED1 LE...

Page 519: ...nceled in response to a press on the push switch 1 7 while LED6 6 is flashing Fig 9 616 18 Check that the communications between the RDD and the copier are executed normally Connect the copier s power plug and switch it on to make sure that LED 2 8 orange flashes Fig 9 617 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 8 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4...

Page 520: ... the label Fig 9 619 21 Fix the RDD s top cover q in place using two screws w Make sure that the Power Unit s cable is fixed in place on the cable guide inside the RDD and is not trapped by the top cover q q w w 0 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 9 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 ...

Page 521: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9 66 ...

Page 522: ...CTION I PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 10 1 II CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES 10 2 A Copier 10 2 B Paper Deck A1 10 3 III SCHEDULED SERVICING TABLE 10 4 IV SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART 10 6 A Copier 10 6 B Paper Deck A1 10 8 This chapter provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables durables and scheduled servicing charts ...

Page 523: ...de with a scheduled service visit as of July 1997 Note The above values are all estimates and are subject to change based on future data Table 10 101 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 1 No 1 2 Parts name Primary pre transfer transfer separation charging wire Primary charging assembly grid wire Par...

Page 524: ...r Duplex upper separation belt Duplexing feeding roller Primary charging wire cleaner 1 Primary charging cleaner 2 Transfer charging wire cleaner Separation charging wire cleaner Pre transfer charging wire cleaner Pre transfer charging assembly scraperr Upper fixing roller Lower fixing roller Parts number FF5 1220 000 FF5 1221 000 FB2 7522 000 FB2 7545 000 FH7 3280 000 FH7 3282 000 FB2 6899 000 FA...

Page 525: ...assembly Pre transfer charging assembly Fixing thermal switch Delivery lower separation claw Developing cylinder Developing assembly roll Parts number FB2 7239 000 FH7 7349 000 FG5 8812 000 FH7 5726 000 FH7 5729 000 FA4 1827 000 FG5 4378 030 FG5 4550 090 FG5 4377 050 FH7 7154 000 FA2 9037 000 FF5 3086 000 FB2 6933 000 Q ty 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 Life copies 500 000 500 000 500 000 1 000 000 1 0...

Page 526: ...e charging assemblies Charging wire Grid wire Shielding plate Roller electrode Clean the optical path Scanner reflecting plate Scanner side reflecting plate Lens No 1 2 3 4 5 6 mirror Dust proofing glass Pre exposure lamp sheet Standard white plate Heat absorbing glass Check the waste toner case Checks Check the general condition Check the faulty copies a Density of image b Dirt on background c Cl...

Page 527: ...ide Separation claw upper lower Cleaning belt check Provide scheduled servicing suited to the number of copies made Clean the copyboard glass Make test copies Make sample copies Put sample copies in order and tidy up the area around the machine Record the most recent counter reading Fill out the Service Sheet and report to the person in charge Checks If the coating of toner on the magnet roller is...

Page 528: ...g glass Heat absorbing glass Standard white plate Reflecting shade scanning lamp Scanner rail Scanner cable Charging wire primary pre transfer transfer separation Grid wire primary Shielding plate each charging assembly Roller electrode waste toner case pre transfer charging assembly Photosensitive rum Anti stray toner sheet primary charging assembly Developing cylinder Developing roller Anti stra...

Page 529: ...mistor Oil receptacle Separation claw upper lower Waste toner Copyboard glass Ozone filter Air filter scanner cooling fan Pick up roller Feeding roller Separation roller Transfer guide roll Registration roller upper lower Feeding belt Feeding roller Pick up roller crescent Upper separation belt Separation lower feeding roller Toner supply mouth Toner receptacle Remarks Replace edge Apply toner Rem...

Page 530: ... NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 8 Unit Pick up assembly Part Pick up roller Feeding roller Separation roller Vertical path roll Remarks at instal lation every 250 000 every 500 000 every 750 000 every 1 000 000 Intervals ...

Page 531: ...PROBLEMS 11 119 A Copy Paper Jams 11 119 B Feeding Faults 11 126 VI ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS 11 127 A Sensors 11 128 B Switches and Solenoids 11 132 C Motors and Fans 11 136 D Clutches 11 138 E Lamps Heaters and Photosensors 11 140 F PCBs 11 142 G Paper Deck A1 11 144 H Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes LED and Check Pins by PCB 11 148 VII SERVICE MODE 11 159 A Outli...

Page 532: ...s absent n If you want to find out the action to take or the steps to correct a specific problem go through the steps in order Answer YES or NO to the questions under Checks and take the action indicated accordingly Guide to the Troubleshooting Table Cause Power plug Covers Power supply Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO NO NO YES Checks Is the power plug connec ted to the power outlet Are the front door and ...

Page 533: ...rminal marked Is the power plug connected to the power outlet Connect the power plug Checks YES NO Action NO 1 Steps Are the front door and the delivery door closed firmly Close the door or the cover NO 2 Is the specified voltage at the power outlet The problem is not of the copier Advise the user NO 3 YES YES YES Omitted COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPA...

Page 534: ...ck the charging assemblies scanning lamp and scanner for dirt Note 2 When turning the screw counterclockwise take care so that the wire is not 7 5mm or less in height Check the copy paper and the transfer system Is the density of gray scale No 1 too low light Clean the standard white plate mirror lens dust roofing glass scanning lamp reflecting plate and heat absorbing glass Turn off and then on t...

Page 535: ...ass Standard white plate Reflecting plate Blower brush Lint free paper Lint free paper Blower brush Cleaning Dry wiping Dry wiping Cleaning No 1 through No 3 mirrors Blower brush or lint free paper Cleaning with blower brush if necessary lint free paper Parts Tools chemicals Remarks Separation claw Upper roller lower roller Feeding assembly Re pick up assembly refreshing roller Re pick up assembly...

Page 536: ... Direct unit 0 1 mm Figure 11 201 2 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Non Image Width registration Select REGIST in service mode Make adjustments so that the image leading edge margin is 4 5 1 5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct unit REGIST 0 1 mm Figure 11 202 4 5 1 5mm 3 4 5 1 5mm 3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 ...

Page 537: ...paper deck cassette so that the edge to edge distance between the copy image and the copy paper is 0 1 5 mm Figure 11 203 a Left Right Front Paper Deck Figure 11 204a Figure 11 204b Adjusting plate Screw Adjusting plate Screw 0 1 5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 6 ...

Page 538: ...f the left right registration is not as specified adjust the position of the latch plate of the deck opening solenoid by turning the two adjusting screws At this time use the scale on the latch plate as a reference Figure 11 205a rear left of compartment Screws Latch plate Scale Screw Adjusting Plate COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHA...

Page 539: ...2 5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct Be sure to adjust the left right registration before making this adjustment a Front Margin Adjustment left margin Select F BLANK in service mode and change the setting Increasing the setting increases the front margin unit 0 1 mm b Adjusting the Rear Margin right margin Select R BLANK in service mode and change the setting Increasing the setting incre...

Page 540: ...11 207 5 Press the user mode key once The scanning lamp turns on and auto adjustment is executed AE_ADJ 1 START Changes to 1 6 Place a newspaper on the copyboard and close the copyboard cover 7 Press the user mode key once The scanning lamp turns on and automatic adjustment is executed AE_ADJ 0 START Changes to 0 8 Press the Reset key twice to end service mode NA 3 Test Sheet Butted COPYRIGHT 1997...

Page 541: ...actuator into the door switch assembly 2 Press the service mode switch over the cover with a clip 3 Select AE_SLOP in service mode 4 Place a newspaper or a relatively dark original on the copyboard 5 Change the setting using the numeric keypad and press the user mode key q If you decrease the setting in adjustment mode Copies of a newspaper will be lighter w If you increase the setting in adjustme...

Page 542: ... mount is in section B of the hole of the glass support front Otherwise change the setting of BRAKE_SC in service mode so that the line in section A is within section B Figure 11 208 B No 1 mirror mount Electrode front Section A of left of wall Glass support front Hole 3 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 11 ...

Page 543: ...d adjust the tension of the cable and the position of the mirror Figure 11 209 Steel ball Wind eight times Fix in place temporaily 1 3 4 8 5 6 2 7 6 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 12 ...

Page 544: ...r 2 Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket 3 Turn the tension adjusting screw so that the reading is as indicated Turn the tension adjusting screw A so that the reading of the spring gauge is 200 50 g when the center of the scanner cable is pulled about 10 mm Figure 11 211 A A 10 mm 10 mm rear front Mirror mount White paint rear front COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV...

Page 545: ...lled the scanner drive cable 1 Move the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 No 3 mirror to the left 2 Set the mirror positioning tool front rear FY9 3011 as shown Figure 11 212 Figure 11 213 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 14 ...

Page 546: ...the No 5 mirror as shown clean the mirror by moving the tool in the direction of the arrow At this time be sure that your finger or the cleaning tool will not touch the No 4 mirror Figure 11 214 7 Routing the Light Blocking Belt q Light blocking belt 1 e Light blocking belt 3 w Light blocking belt 2 r Light blocking belt 4 Figure 11 215 q w e r q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 ...

Page 547: ...SL1 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the multifeeder assembly See Chapter 5 3 Adjust the stroke of the scanner locking solenoid as indicated Figure 11 217 E ring Standards 10 5 0 5 mm from bottom of clamp to top of solenoid Scanner locking solenoid Loosen these two screws to adjust q w Own weight COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER...

Page 548: ...ng screws used to fix the motor unit in place at the front Figure 11 218 3 Loosen the mounting screw and move the assembly in the direction indicated in Figure 11 219 then fix it in place temporarily Figure 11 219 4 Free a length of charging wire about 5 cm from the charging wire reel 0 1mm dia then form a loop at its end 2mm dia Reference To form a loop wind the charging wire around a hex key thr...

Page 549: ...ckwise and fix it in place with the mounting screw 8 Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper 9 Tighten the mounting screw loosened in step 8 Take care to avoid deformation slack of the charging assembly Try to tighten the mounting screw front on the shielding plate left right earlier Stud A Screw B COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CH...

Page 550: ...A full turn changes the position of the charging wire by about 0 7 mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 19 Charging assembly Primary Pre transfer Transfer Separation Height of charging wire 7 5 1 5 0mm 7 5 1 5 0mm 9 5 1 0 0mm 10 2 0 5mm A 16 2 0 5mm B 14 9 0 5mm A B Tolerance 1mm No adjusting mechanism 2mm 2...

Page 551: ...hown in Figure 11 221 Standard w standard frame erasing Table 11 202 Figure 11 221 6 If the non image width is not as specified turn the adjusting screw to adjust the position of the blanking exposure lamp assembly Figure 11 222 Adjusting screw A A 10 mm 10 mm rear Mirror mount COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING...

Page 552: ...g Assembly Side Seal Be sure that the side seal does not protrude inside the cleaner housing Figure 11 224 Attachment reference Side seal Roller electrode Scraper COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 21 ...

Page 553: ...ve the toner coated on the surface of the magnet roller Shape copy paper into the letter U and scoop up the toner Figure 11 225 rear Figure 11 225a front Toner guide roller 4 8mm Side scraper front Magnet roller Remove waste toner collecting here front 30 40mm A Toner guide roller 4 8mm Side scraper rear Magnet roller Remove waste toner collecting here rear 30 40mm A COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON...

Page 554: ...iewing it from the front 5 When the area cleaned in step 3 has taken on a new coating repeat steps 3 through 5 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 23 ...

Page 555: ...sembly make sure that the round marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar gold face the front of the copier Figure 11 226 The collar of the pick up roller at the rear is silver When installing the pick up roller r to the pick up roller make sure that the round marking t on the collar silver faces the rear Figure 11 226a r t Direction of rotation Collar silver Rear q...

Page 556: ...ler assembly q of the cassette deck pick up assembly be sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r be sure that the marking 5 t faces the front Figure 11 228 w q r 5 5 e t Front Wider groove Narrower groove front of copier rear of copier COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU J...

Page 557: ...on the collar silver faces the front q Pick up roller w Marking collar Figure 11 229 The collar of the pick up roller at the rear is gold When installing the pick up roller r to the pick up assembly make sure that the round marking t on the side of the roller and the round marking y on the collar gold face the rear r Pick up roller t Marking roller y Marking collar Figure 11 229a r t y Direction o...

Page 558: ...e 11 230 5 1Orientation of the Paper Deck A1 Feeding Roller When installing the feeding roller assembly q to the left deck pick up assembly make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r make sure that the marking 5 t faces the rear Figure 11 230a 5 5 w q r e Front e w q r 5 5 e t Front COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 N...

Page 559: ... pressure spring If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow B If pick up failure occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A q Feeding roller e Locking lever w Separation roller r Pressure spring Figure 11 231 q w e r A B COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 28 ...

Page 560: ...er If double feeding or pick up failure occurs during pick up adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A If pick up failure occurs move the spring in the direction of B Figure 11 233 B A 32 7 0 1mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TR...

Page 561: ... of the A roller support plate bushing from the bottom face of the pick up unit of each holder is 36 0 5 mm when the plunger of the pick up roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown Figure 11 234 36 0 5 mm A q COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 30 ...

Page 562: ... paper deck A1 Before removing the deck pick up roller releasing solenoid q from the support plate remember the position of the two fixing screws w on the solenoid with reference to the scale on the support plate Or mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scribe If you are installing the solenoid on its own be sure to fix it in its initial position Figure 11 234b q w A 57 2 0...

Page 563: ...he direction of A so that the gap between the shutter q and the shutter plate w is 0 4 0 2 mm when the solenoid is pulled Figure 11 235 Figure 11 235a q w 0 4 0 2mm 0 4 0 2mm A COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 32 ...

Page 564: ...lecting plate solenoid Fix the delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid temporarily in place with a mounting screw then move down the lever q in the direction of arrow A push the delivery deflecting plate drive solenoid w B in the direction of arrow B and tighten the mounting screw e Figure 11 237 q w e B A Pulley Timing belt Rack plate Pulley Section A B Slide volume COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANO...

Page 565: ... solenoid is 5 0 0 3 mm Figure 11 238 14 Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate Mark the position of the side guide plate with a pencil in advance and install it with reference to the marking Figure 11 239 5 0 0 3mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 34 ...

Page 566: ... the marking Figure 11 240 16 Adjusting the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate Butt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A open state Then attach the timing belt to the pulley Figure 11 241 A COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 35 ...

Page 567: ...er and solenoid is 1 5 0 3 mm Figure 11 242 18 Drive Belt Route the drive belt on the pulley and the roller as shown Figure 11 243 Registration feeding drive belt Drum drive belt Main motor Fixing waste toner drive belt 1 5 0 3mm COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 36 ...

Page 568: ... 37 Figure 11 244 Caution When installing the holding drive belt be sure to attach the holding tray drive belt on the pulley at the bottom inside when viewing form the rear and to attach the pick up drive belt on the pulley at the top outside when viewing from the rear Pick up motor Holding tray drive belt Pick up drive belt ...

Page 569: ... the sub heater when viewing from the rear 2 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Points to Note in the Field q For the position see the diagram w The low position is when the solenoid SL16 is ON e Make sure the difference in height of the inlet guide between front and rear is 0 5 mm or less r To adjust the height of the inlet guide loosen the fixing screw on the height adjust...

Page 570: ...et guide mount you need to adjust the inlet guide plate If you should have loosened it be sure to adjust it to its initial position with reference to the scale on the fixing assembly mount front Inlet guide a b a b rear Fixing assembly bottom plate a b 0 5mm Inlet guide lower roller upper roller 59 7mm 0 1 62 9mm 0 1 high position COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTE...

Page 571: ...1 246 Note a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper Take measurements when both upper and lower rollers are adequately warm Table 11 203 a Taking Measurements Wait 15 min after the end of the machine s warm up period then make 20 A4 copies before taking measurements 1 Select A3 2 Open the copyboard cover 3 Start service mode and select NIP nip adjustment 4 Press the user mode ke...

Page 572: ... have replaced any parts that make up the following adjust the set screw e so that the distance between 41T gear q and the control ring w is 0 1 to 0 3 mm about 4 sheets of plain paper 64 g m2 Figure 11 247 q w e COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 41 ...

Page 573: ...tial control system or the developing transfer system requiring a check on the surface potential You may check the surface potential in service mode b Disabling the Auto Control Mechanism You may disable the auto control mechanism to find out whether the corona current control lamp intensity control or developing bias control is faulty or not non auto control mode Further as a temporary remedy you...

Page 574: ...nput or the output side of the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB c Zero Level Check You may use a zero level check to find out whether the surface potential control circuit is good or not Reference In a zero level check a check is made to find out whether the microprocessor identifies a 0V condition when the surface potential of the drum is 0 V Using a zero level check you can find out wheth...

Page 575: ...01B If not between 0003 and 0001B suspect a fault on the DC controller PCB 5 Turn off the power switch and remove the door switch actuator 6 Remove the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB 7 Connect the connector to J103 on the DC controller PCB 8 Turn on the power switch w Method 2 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Remove the blanking exposure lamp assembly 3 Connect the connector of the potential ...

Page 576: ...or once you have turned on the power switch 8 Start service mode and check to make sure that address P023 during initial rotation hexadecimal analog value is between 0003 and 0001B Reference 1 If the indication is as specified under method 1 and not as specified under method 2 Suspect dirt on the sensor or a fault in the potential measurement unit 2 If the indication is as specified under both met...

Page 577: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 46 ...

Page 578: ...al control mode 4 PO CONT 0 Turn on the power switch Clean the standard white plate mirror lens and dust proofing glass then turn off and on the power switch Select non potential control 4 PO CONT 1 START NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO transfer output zero level check End Turn on the power switch Start service mode 4 Is the indication of address P023 during initial rotation between 0003 and...

Page 579: ...nvert the reading during copying µA into its control voltage according to 4 Potential Control Conversion Table Replace the DC controller PCB NO YES YES NO YES Measure the voltage during copying between J114A 5 and A 13 on the DC controller PCB primary output Is the difference between the actual value in step B and the reading of PC 10 Replace the DC controller PCB NO A Replace the DC controller PC...

Page 580: ...128 1 120 Developing bias V 0 3 7 11 15 18 22 26 30 33 37 41 45 48 52 56 60 63 67 71 75 78 82 86 90 93 97 101 105 108 112 116 120 Pre transfer µA 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 66 Transfer µA 440 437 434 431 429 426 426 420 418 415 412 409 407 404 401 398 396 393 390 387 385 382 379 376 374 371 368 365 363 360 357 354 352 Separation µA 10...

Page 581: ...5 936 927 918 910 901 892 883 875 866 857 848 840 831 822 Developing bias V 123 127 131 135 138 142 146 150 153 157 161 165 168 172 176 180 183 187 191 195 198 202 206 210 213 217 221 225 228 232 236 240 243 247 Pre transfer µA 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 99 101 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117 119 121 123 125 127 129 132 134 136 Transfer µA 349 346 343 341 338 335 332 330 327 324 ...

Page 582: ...77 568 560 551 542 533 525 Developing bias V 251 255 258 262 266 270 273 277 281 285 288 292 296 300 303 307 311 315 318 322 326 330 333 337 341 345 348 352 356 360 363 367 371 375 Pre transfer µA 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 152 154 156 158 160 162 165 167 169 171 173 175 177 179 181 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 198 200 202 204 206 Transfer µA 255 253 250 247 244 242 239 236 233 231 228 225 222 220...

Page 583: ...288 280 271 262 253 245 236 227 Developing bias V 378 382 386 390 393 397 401 405 408 412 416 420 423 427 431 435 438 442 446 450 453 457 461 465 468 472 476 480 483 487 491 495 498 502 Pre transfer µA 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 228 231 233 235 237 239 241 243 245 247 249 251 253 255 257 259 261 264 266 268 270 272 274 276 Transfer µA 162 159 156 154 151 148 145 143 140 137 134 132 12...

Page 584: ...83 175 166 157 148 140 131 122 113 105 96 87 78 70 61 52 43 35 26 17 8 0 Developing bias V 506 510 513 517 521 525 528 532 536 540 543 547 551 555 558 562 566 570 573 577 581 585 588 592 596 600 Pre transfer µA 278 280 282 284 286 288 290 292 294 297 299 301 303 305 307 309 311 313 315 317 319 321 323 325 327 330 Transfer µA 68 66 63 60 57 55 52 49 46 44 41 38 35 33 30 27 24 22 19 16 13 11 8 5 2 0...

Page 585: ... for 5 min 5 Start service mode and take notes of the readings of temperature and humidity on the control panel display Data B RTMP C Data B1 RHUM Data B2 6 Compare data A and data B difference between data A1 and data B1 is 0 5 difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 20 If the difference between data A and data B is not as specified replace the environment sensor 7 Press the Reset key twice a...

Page 586: ...o GND on the DC controller PCB 3 Connect the probe to the terminals DC controller PCB shown in the table 4 Make checks as instructed b Using Service Mode 1 Open the front door and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly 2 Press the service switch with a clip over the cover 3 Press and in sequence on the control panel 4 Using the keypad on the control panel enter the address o...

Page 587: ... while in standby Move the copyboard cover by hand while in standby Put paper over PS6 while in standby Put paper over PS7 while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS8 while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS9 while in standby Checks When the light block ing plate is at PS1 When the light block ing plate is not at PS1 When the light block ing plat...

Page 588: ...le in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS11 while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS12 while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS14 while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS15 while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS17 while in standby Checks When paper is inserted When p...

Page 589: ... hand while in standby Move the side guide by hand while in standby Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS22 while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Checks When paper is inserted When paper is not inserted When the light blocking plate is at PS20 When the light blocking plate is not at PS20 When the light bloc...

Page 590: ...tecting lever by hand while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Checks When the light blocking plate is at PS25 When the light blocking plate is not at PS25 When the light blocking plate is at PS26 When the light blocking plate is not at PS26 When the light blocking plate is...

Page 591: ...ve the detecting lever by hand while in standby Checks When the light blocking plate is at PS32 When the light blocking plate is not at PS32 When the light blocking plate is at PS33 When the light blocking plate is not at PS33 When the light blocking plate is at PS34 When the light blocking plate is not at PS34 When the light blocking plate is at PS35 When the light blocking plate is not at PS35 W...

Page 592: ...d while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Checks When the light blocking plate is at PS39 When the light blocking plate is not at PS39 When the light blocking plate is at PS40 When the light blocking plate is not at PS40 When the light blocking plate is at PS41 When the li...

Page 593: ... 19 P009 01 J108A 2 P005 01 Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby Hold the grip and move the cassette 3 Hold the grip and move the cassette 4 Move the detecting lever while in standby Move the releasing lever of the fixing feed ing assem bly by hand while in standby Checks When the light blocking plate is at PS49 When the light blocking plate is not at PS49 When the light blocking plat...

Page 594: ...ce mode 4 and select the 8th screen 2 Slide out the cassette 3 and set the paper width guide plate inside to STMTR then slide the cassette into the machine 3 Press C3_STMTR on the screen on the control panel 4 Press the key Check to make sure that the value XXXX indicated under C3_STMTR XXX is the same as XXX 5 Slide out the cassette 3 and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette to A4R...

Page 595: ...not in a place exposed to ammonium gas d The machine is not exposed to direct rays of the sun Otherwise provide curtains e The room is well ventilated f The machine is kept level 2 Checking the Originals Check the originals to find out whether the problem is caused by the type of original or the machine a The copy density lever is best set to scale 5 1 b Originals with a reddish background may not...

Page 596: ...arging assembly for displacement 5 Checking the Developing Assembly a Check to make sure that the rolls on both ends of the developing assembly are in contact with the drum b Check to make sure that the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner 6 Checking the Paper a Check to make sure that the paper is of a type recommended by Canon b Check to make sure that the pap...

Page 597: ...n front or is too light or foggy perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure before consulting the troubleshooting tables COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 66 ...

Page 598: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 67 ...

Page 599: ...B Sample Image Faults not available COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 68 ...

Page 600: ... Adjustment Basic Procedure Is the problem corrected Clean the standard white plate mirror lens and dust proofing glass Is the problem corrected Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the drum during copying Is the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner Replace the lamp regulator Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES YES NO NO YES NO Action End E...

Page 601: ...f the transfer charging assembly hooked correctly and is its height correct Is the transfer separation assembly set securely Set FUZZY in service mode to 1 and make a copy Is the problem corrected Try fresh copy paper Is the problem corrected 5 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO YES NO NO NO YES NO YES Action End Go to step 7 1 Hook the charging wire correctly 2 Adjust the height of the charging wire 1 Clean...

Page 602: ...its height correct Is the pre transfer charging assembly set correctly Turn off and then on the power switch and check the readings of VD and VL1 in service mode Are the readings of VDM and VL1M the target value VDT VL1T 10V 1 Step 7 8 9 10 11 YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO YES Action 1 Check to see if the transfer guide should be in contact with the side plate of the feeding assembly metal section 2 R...

Page 603: ...otosensitive drum Clean the scanning lamp reflecting plate side reflecting plate mirror lens dust proofing glass and heat absorbing glass Is the problem corrected Is the pre exposure lamp flashing during copying Is the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner Step 1 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES Action End Check the developing assembly locking unit End 1 Replace the pre exposur...

Page 604: ...rectly Is the pre exposure lamp flashing during copying Are the developing rolls worn Replace the developing cylinder Is the problem corrected Replace the lamp regulator Is the problem corrected Make the checks on p 11 42 Is the potential sensor normal Set the meter to the 30VDC range and measure the voltage between J111A 2 DCBC and J114A 13 GND on the DC controller PCB Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YES ...

Page 605: ...mbly Checks Clean the charging wire grid wire and shielding plate Is the problem corrected Clean the scanning lamp reflecting plate side reflecting plate lens mirror dust proofing glass and heat absorbing glass Is the problem corrected Clean the pre exposure lamp Is the problem corrected Is the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO YES YES YES NO YES Action End...

Page 606: ...out Are there scratches or black lines on the surface of the photosensitive drum in the peripheral direction Are there scratches or black lines on the surface of the fixing assembly upper roller in the peripheral direction Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO YES NO YES YES YES NO YES NO Action Check the copyboard glass for dirt and scratches at the point where the scanner is fixed in position in stream readin...

Page 607: ... assembly Is the problem corrected Is the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner Use fresh copy paper Is the problem corrected Are there scratches on the surface of the photosensitive drum corresponding to the problem in the copy image in the peripheral direction Step 1 2 3 4 5 YES NO NO YES NO YES YES Action 1 Clean the inlet upper lower of the fixing assembly 2 Check the upper ro...

Page 608: ... Are the blank exposure LEDs lamp corresponding to the problem in the copy image ON while the scanner is moving forward Step 6 7 YES NO YES YES NO Action 1 Clean the pre transfer charging assembly and the transfer separation charging assembly If the dirt cannot be removed replace the charging wire 2 Try replacing the copy paper 3 Select FUZZY in ser vice mode and set it to 3 Check the wiring from ...

Page 609: ...ted Does the problem occur at the same location on all copies Are there scratches on the surface of the photosensitive drum Step 1 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES YES YES YES NO YES Action 1 Clean the developing rolls 2 Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder 3 If the surface of the developing cylinder have scratches replace the developing cylinder 1 Clean the drum 2 If scratches are found replace the ...

Page 610: ...roblem occur at intervals of about 52 mm Is the take up mechanism of the fixing cleaning belt and the cleaning mechanism of the upper roller normal Step 1 2 3 YES NO NO YES NO NO YES Action Go to step 3 1 Clean the registration roller 2 Clean the transfer guide 3 Check the developing assembly for leakage of toner 1 Clean the feeding assembly 2 Check the cleaner assembly for leakage of toner 1 Chec...

Page 611: ...n vertical direction Does the heater H1 H2 turn on immediately after power on Is the lower roller pressure nip as specified Is the paper of a type recommended by Canon Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO YES NO NO NO YES Action Check the upper roller and the lower roller for scratches See The heater fails to turn on Adjust the lower roller pressure Try paper recommended by Canon If the results are good advise the...

Page 612: ...ies Has the pick up roller reached its average life Adjust the leading edge margin Is the problem corrected Set the meter to the 30DC range and measure the voltage between J108A 5 and J108A 6 on the DC controller PCB Does it change from 24 to 0 V instantaneously while the scanner is moving forward Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO NO NO YES NO YES YES YES NO Action Place it correctly Try recommended paper I...

Page 613: ...othly Does the problem occur at intervals of about 25 cm Does the problem occur at intervals of about 3 mm Does the problem occur at intervals of about 6 mm Does the problem occur at intervals of about 6 mm Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO YES NO YES YES YES YES NO Action 1 Route the cable once again 2 If cable is twisted or frayed replace it Clean the surface of the scanner rail with alcohol Thereafter ap...

Page 614: ...erent Step 1 2 3 YES NO YES YES NO YES Action Go to step 3 Check the scanning lamp and the lamp regulator Check the scanning system Check the feeding system Cause Copyboard glass Mirror Scanner Photosensitive drum Lens drive assembly Checks Is oil found on the copyboard glass Is the horizontal reproduction ratio in Direct mode as specified Clean the scanning lamp reflecting plate mirror lens dust ...

Page 615: ...ng copying Are the connectors of the PCBs connected securely Is the control by the potential sensor executed normally Is the contact of the developing bias firmly in place Is the 1st copy blank halfway Is the 1st copy blank does the 2nd copy have displaced registra tion and does a stationary jam occur in this condition Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YES NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Action Set the chargi...

Page 616: ... disconnect the power plug Does the heater of the fixing roller turn on when the power switch is turned on Caution Keep in mind that repeating this step several times will cause the fixing temperature to rise abnormally damaging the fixing roller and the separation claws Turn off the power switch cool the upper fixing roller and turn on the power switch Select the screen showing FTMP in service mo...

Page 617: ... DC controller PCB Checks Execute ERROR in service mode and open the front door and the delivery assembly to cool the fixing roller Is E001 indicated immediately after power on when the power switch is turned on Turn off the power switch and slide out the fixing feeding assembly Disconnect the relay connector J2757 from inside the fixing unit and set the meter to the 1KΩ range Connect the probe to...

Page 618: ...n contact with the upper fixing roller Clean the contact area of the ther mistor Is the problem corrected Does the problem occur only when the machine is turned on for the first time in the morning Replace the thermistor Is the problem corrected 4 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO YES NO NO YES YES YES NO Action Go to the appropriate section Connect them securely Install the thermistor once again End Advise...

Page 619: ...3 4 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES Action Replace the cleaning belt Correct the position of the lever The connector at the rear of the fixing feeding unit may have poor contact make a check Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the sensor Cause DC controller PCB Main motor M1 Checks Is the connector of the main motor connected Does the voltage between J111B 4 and J111B 1 on the DC controller PCB change ...

Page 620: ...e between J114B 1 and J114B 2 on the DC controller PCB about 5 V when the switch is pressed and about 0 V when released Does the harness of the vertical path roller drive clutch have an open circuit Step 1 2 3 YES NO YES NO YES YES Action The feeding screw inside the waste toner pipe is locked for some reason Remove the waste toner pipe and try turing the screw by hand If it can be rotated easily ...

Page 621: ...s indicated Voltage J114B 10 J114B 9 about 12 V J114B 12 J114B 11 about 5 V Connect the probe to J114B 8 and the probe to GND on the DC controller PCB Does the voltage change to about 5 V as soon as the motor starts to rotate Replace the pick up motor M2 Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO NO NO YES Action Check the wiring from the DC power supply PCB to the motor controller PCB if nor...

Page 622: ... and press the key At this time does the hopper motor rotate for about 3 sec Install the developing assembly and set the copy count to 20 Select P002 in service mode Does bit 9 DTEP on the message display indicate 0 toner present during copying Is the connector disconnected Is the end of the outlet cover bent limiting the amount of toner moving from the hopper to the developing assembly 2 4 2 Step...

Page 623: ... YES NO NO YES NO Action Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the total copy counter if normal replace the total copy counter Replace the total copy counter Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Total copy counter Total copy counter DC controller PCB Checks Turn off the power switch and disconnect J104 from the DC controller Set the meter to the 1K range and measure the resistance between ...

Page 624: ...een the following connectors on the side deck drive PCB Signal Connectors 38VU J5 1 Ö J9 1 0VU J5 2 Ö J9 3 DMFG J7 3 Ö J10 9 DMON J7 5 Ö J10 7 0VU J7 6 Ö J9 3 12VU J7 7 Ö J11 13 0VR J7 8 Ö J11 12 5VR J7 9 Ö J11 11 Replace the deck main motor M101 of the paper deck A1 Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 YES NO NO YES NO Action Replace the side deck driver PCB End Check the harness from the DC control...

Page 625: ...ontinuity between the following pins on the motor side J209 1 and 2 J209 5 and 6 Replace the holding tray driver PCB Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 3 YES NO NO NO YES NO Action Replace the sensor PS21 Replace the holding tray X motor M8 End Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Holding tray Y home position sensor PS20 Holding tray Y motor M9 Holding tray driver PCB DC controller PCB Checks Is the...

Page 626: ... from the DC controller PCB to PS3 4 if normal replace PS3 4 Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Scanner home position sensor DC controller PCB Checks Is the scanner at home position when E202 is indicated Is the scanner home position sensor PS1 normal Step 1 2 YES NO NO NO YES Action See The scanner fails to move forward Replace the scanner home position sensor Replace the DC controller PCB Cause...

Page 627: ...absent between the X direction drive belt and the belt support plate Replace the DC controller PCB Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO NO YES YES Action See The lens fails to move Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to PS6 if normal replace PS6 Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to PS7 if normal replace PS7 Replace the belt support plate with one with spacers End Cause...

Page 628: ...roller PCB Control panel PCB Checks Turn on and off the power switch Is the problem corrected Replace the control panel PCB Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 YES NO YES NO YES Action End Replace the DC controller PCB End Cause Malfunction Connector RDF controller PCB DC controller PCB Checks Turn off and then on the power switch Is the problem corrected Is the connector J772 connecting the RDF and...

Page 629: ... of the meter to the connector terminal on the power switch side Is the voltage about 30Ω Step 1 2 3 YES NO YES NO NO YES Action End Connect it securely Replace the power switch SW1 Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the power switch SW1 if normal replace the DC controller PCB Cause Malfunction DC controller PCB Power supply unit Checks Turn off and on the power switch Is the problem c...

Page 630: ...Is the front door closed securely Is the front door switch SW2 firmly pressed when the front door is closed Remove the door switch and connect the probe of the meter to door switches 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 is the resistance 0Ω when the actuator is pressed and Ω when released Is the wiring connected to the door switch normal Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the power switch SW1 Is t...

Page 631: ...the DC power supply PCB J303 J304 J305 J306 J308 J309 J311 Turn on the power switch and measure the voltage between the terminals shown Is it as indicated However the above assumes that the inaccuracy of the AC input is 10 Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO YES YES YES NO Action See AC power is absent Remove the cause and replace the fuse End Turn off the power switch connect one of the disconnected con necto...

Page 632: ...oving up heard Does the pick up roller rotate Is the belt used to transmit drive to the pick up roller attached correctly Is the drive from the pick up motor transmitted to the pick up assembly through the drive belt gear and coupling Set the meter to the 30VDC range Does the voltage between J116A 2 J121A 5 and GND change from 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is pressed Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO NO...

Page 633: ...age between J116B 8 J121A 2 and GND on the DC controller PCB change from about 0 to 5 V when the deck is closed Set the meter to the 12VDC range Is the voltage between J116A 7 4 and GND as indicated when the deck is opened closed when closed 0 V when opened 5 V Set the meter to the 30VDC range Does the voltage between J119B 9 left 11 right and GND on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to 24 V whe...

Page 634: ...ght door fully closed Are the upper right door and the lower right door keeping the vertical path rollers 0 1 2 3 and 4 in place Open the upper right door and the lower right door and insert a screwdriver into the door switch Do the vertical path rollers 0 1 2 3 and 4 rotate when the Copy Start key is pressed Is the leading edge of the copy paper as far as the registration roller assembly Open the...

Page 635: ...tors on the DC controller shown Does the voltage change from 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is pressed Find out which sensor found the jam using B JAM in service mode Is the sensor normal 4 Step 8 9 YES NO YES NO NO YES Action Check the wiring if normal replace the corresponding clutch Replace the DC controller PCB Check the wiring and the lever if normal replace the sensor Remove the pick up a...

Page 636: ... pick up roller releasing lever with a finger Does the pick up roller move down Is the lifter sensor PS25 PS28 normal Connect the connectors and turn on the power switch Set the meter to the 30VDC range and connect the probe to GND and the probe to the following Does the voltage change from about 0 to 24 V when the cassette is slid in M14 J119A 9 M15 J119A 11 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO NO NO NO NO NO...

Page 637: ...ing edge of the copy paper as far as the registration roller Set the meter to the 30VDC range and connect the probe of the meter to J115B 1 and J115B 2 on the DC controller PCB then select the multifeeder Does the voltage change from 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is pressed Connect the probes of the meter to J115B 11 and J115B 12 on the DC controller PCB Does the voltage change from about 0 V ...

Page 638: ... 3 YES NO NO NO YES NO Action Install the belt gear and coupling correctly Replace the sensor PS23 Replace the clutch CL9 Replace the DC controller PCB Cause Belt Gear Coupling Vertical path roller clutch DC controller PCB Checks Is the drive from the pick up motor M2 transmitted to each vertical path roller through the belt gear and coupling Connect the probe of the tester to GND and the probe to...

Page 639: ...foreign object that comes into contact with the scanner As necessary clean lubricate or correct Reference If the surface of the rail is soiled clean it with alcohol and apply a small amount of lubricant Replace the scanner motor Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the scanner motor if normal replace the DC controller Voltage M3ON J112B 6 J112B 3 about 0 to 5 V M3F R J112B 7 J112B 3 abou...

Page 640: ...g exposure lamp Does the new lamp turn on correctly 4 Step 1 2 YES NO YES YES NO Action Check the wiring from the blanking exposure lamp to the DC controller PCB if normal replace the DC controller PCB End Check the wiring from the blanking exposure lamp to the DC controller PCB if normal replace the DC controller PCB Cause DC controller PCB Pre exposure lamp PCB Checks Set the meter to the 30VDC ...

Page 641: ... the connector J4 Does the index of the meter swing when the probes of the meter are connected to both terminals of the lamp Set the meter to the 12VDC range and measure the voltage between J111B 8 and J111B 5 on the DC controller PCB Does it change from about 5 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is pressed Replace the lamp regulator Is the problem corrected 4 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action The connector may...

Page 642: ... rotate Does bit 10 of P002 in service mode indicate 0 toner absent When the hopper motor is turned on by executing HPPR MTR in service mode does the voltage between J105A 1 and J105A 2 on the DC controller PCB change from 24 to about 0 V Is the connection of relay connec tors J770 and J719 secure 4 4 4 Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO YES NO NO Action Go to step 3 If there is toner in the developing assemb...

Page 643: ...etection PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Connect the connectors securely Cause DC controller PCB J7 AC driver Drum heater H3 Drum heater controller PCB Checks Open the front door and release the fixing feeding assembly Is the end of the drum warm Do NOT touch the surface of the drum Set the meter to the 12VDC range and connect the probes of the DC controller PCB to J120B 2 and J120B 1 on the DC ...

Page 644: ...5 1 and J305 2 on the DC controller PCB Is there 24 VU DC Set the meter to the 200 range and connect the probes of the meter to the connectors of the lens motor indicated is the resistance between connectors as indicated Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO NO NO YES NO Action Check the rail for foreign matter and dirt Clean as necessary Attach the belt correctly See DC power is absent Replace the DC controller...

Page 645: ...e upper cover of the developing assembly Is the toner level sensor blocked by toner 2 Step 1 2 3 YES NO YES NO YES YES Action Go to step 3 1 Replace the toner sensor TS1 2 Replace the DC controller PCB 1 Replace the DC controller PCB 2 Replace the control panel End Cause Toner Toner sensor TS1 DC controller PCB Control panel Checks Is there toner at the rear of the hopper assembly Select P002 in s...

Page 646: ...ler PCB Cause Control card DC controller PCB CC V Checks Is the control card inserted correctly Can copies be made Step 1 2 YES NO NO NO YES Action Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the CC V Cause Coupling fixing assembly waste toner drive assembly Checks Is the parallel pin groove of the coupling chafed so that the coupling does not move smoothly Step 1 YES NO YE...

Page 647: ... to both terminals of the thermal switch TP1 Is there electrical continuity Slide out the fixing assembly and connect probes of the meter to both terminals of the fixing heater H1 H2 Is there electrical continuity Is the voltage between the connectors on the DC controller PCB indicated in the table 5 V Step 1 2 3 YES NO NO NO YES NO Action Replace the thermal switch Replace the fixing heater Repla...

Page 648: ...he compartment is set Does the pick up roller rotate Is the belt used to transmit the drive to the pick up roll attached correctly Is the drive from the deck main motor transmitted to the pick up assembly through the drive belt gear and coupling Set the meter to the 30VDC range Does the voltage between J2001A 9 J2001A 10 and GND change from 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is pressed Step 1 2 3 4...

Page 649: ...Does the deck lifter motor rotate Set the meter to the 12VDC range Does the voltage between 2001A 3 and GND on the DC controller PCB change from about 0 to 5 V when the deck is closed Set the meter to the 12VDC range Does the voltage between J2001A 4 and GND on the DC controller PCB change as follows when the deck is closed 0 V when the deck is opened 5 V Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO NO NO NO YES NO YE...

Page 650: ... Drum cleaner assembly t Holding tray assembly y Feeding assembly The troubleshooting procedures therefore are organized according to location You can check the location and the type of jam using B_JAM in service mode eight most recent jams Figure 11 501 e t q r y w 1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 119 ...

Page 651: ...urled or wavy Try Canon recommended paper Is the problem corrected Is the pick up roller of the selected cassette deck or multifeeder rotating during copying Is the pick up roller deformed or worn Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO YES YES NO YES NO Action Replace the paper Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper See the relevant section Repla...

Page 652: ...y Is the transfer separation charging assembly set correctly Are there burrs on the paper guide of the transfer separation charging assembly Try Canon recommended paper Is the problem corrected Is the separation claw under the cleaner assembly damaged Are the two feeding belts moving normally Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES YES NO YES Action Go to step 5 Set the f...

Page 653: ...Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YES NO YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES Action 1 Replace the separation claw 2 If dirt is found clean the part with solvent Replace the roller Clean it with solvent Adjust the height Adjust the nip Check the fixing cleaner assembly Adjust so that the lever moves smoothly Replace the sensor Orient the paper deflecting plate correctly Check the delivery roller drive ass...

Page 654: ...y Is the height of the charging wire as specified Is the separation claw under the cleaner assembly damaged Try Canon recommended paper Is the problem corrected Step 1 2 3 4 YES NO NO NO YES YES NO Action Set the transfer separa tion charging assembly securely Adjust the height of the charging wire Replace the separation claw Advise the user to use recommended paper 1 Check the high voltage transf...

Page 655: ...PS14 normal Is the holding tray weight plate operating Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Action Replace the clutch CL6 Replace the solenoid SL6 Replace the sensor PS17 Replace the clutch CL3 Replace the sensor PS14 Replace the solenoid SL7 Cause Holding tray paper deflecting plate Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid SL8 Holding tray reversing clutch CL4 Checks Perform the steps un...

Page 656: ...eeding assem bly 1 paper sensor PS8 Holding tray feeding assem bly 2 paper sensor PS9 Checks Is the holding tray feeding assembly set correctly Does the paper move correctly inside the holding tray feeding assembly Are the holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor PS8 and the holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS9 normal Step 1 2 3 YES NO NO NO NO Action Set it correctly Replace the c...

Page 657: ...E AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 126 Cause Separation roller Spring Checks Is the separation roller deformed or worn Step 1 YES NO YES NO Action Replace the separation roller Replace the spring used to pull the separation roller Cause Pick up assembly Copy paper Paper guide Lower roller Upper lower roller Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 YES NO YES YES NO YES NO NO NO Action Check the pick up assembly Che...

Page 658: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 127 VI ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS ...

Page 659: ...APAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 128 A Sensors Figure 11 601 PS3 PS1 PS4 PS7 PS48 PS5 SVR1 PS22 PS30 PS25 PS28 PS29 SV2 SV1 SVR3 SVR2 PS6 PS23 PS11 PS53 PS12 PS52 PS47 PS10 PS21 PS8 PS33 PS17 PS14 PS19 PS9 PS15 PS51 PS41 PS42 PS24 PS26 PS20 PS36 PS50 PS46 ...

Page 660: ...tration paper detection Holding tray inlet paper detection Holding tray pick up detection Holding tray re circulating bar home position detection Holding tray Y home position detection Holding tray X home position detection Multifeeder pick up detection Registration paper detection Pick up vertical path 0 paper detection Cassette 3 lifter detection Cassette 3 paper detection Pick up vertical path ...

Page 661: ...Figure 11 602 PS37 PS39 PS34 PS35 PS40 PS49 PS32 PS31 PS38 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 130 ...

Page 662: ...r Notation PS31 PS32 PS34 PS35 PS37 PS38 PS39 PS40 PS49 Function Right deck lifter position detection Right deck paper detection Left deck lifter position detection Left deck paper detection Right deck lifter limit detection Right deck open closed detection Left deck lifter limit detection Left deck open closed detection Left deck pick up assembly outlet paper detection ...

Page 663: ...NC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 132 B Swithes and Solenoids Figure 11 603 SL1 MSW4 SL6 SL3 SL11 SL12 SL10 SL14 SL7 SL8 SL9 SL2 SW2 SW3 MSW5 SL13 SL15 SW1 ...

Page 664: ...er deflecting plate drive Fixing drive Holding tray re pick up roller D cut roller drive Holding tray weight drive Holding tray paper deflecting plate drive Holding tray swinging Multifeeder pick up Cassette 3 pick up roller release Cassette 4 pick up roller release Fixing feeding unit locking Fixing cleaning belt drive Multifeeder pick up relay Fixing assembly inlet guide drive Waste toner feedin...

Page 665: ...Figure 11 604 SL4 SL5 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 134 ...

Page 666: ...N NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 135 Table 11 604 Symbol S L Name Solenoid Notation SL4 SL5 Function Right deck pick up roller release Left deck pick up roller release ...

Page 667: ...NON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 136 C Motors and Fans Figure 11 605 M3 M4 M5 M7 M2 M12 M10 M6 M9 M14 M8 M15 M13 FM8 FM7 FM6 FM3 M1 M11 FM5 FM2 ...

Page 668: ...st fan Fixing heat discharge fan Developing fan Feeding fan Cleaner fan Scanner cooling fan Main motor Pick up motor Scanner motor Lens X motor Lens Y motor Transfer separation charging wire cleaning motor Holding tray re circulating bar motor Holding ray X motor Holding tray Y motor Hopper motor toner supply Hopper motor toner stirring Primary charging wire cleaning motor Pre transfer charging wi...

Page 669: ...Notation CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 CL6 CL7 CL8 CL9 CL10 CL11 CL12 CL13 CL15 CL17 CL18 Function Holding tray feeding 1 Holding tray feeding 2 Holding tray registration Holding tray reversal Holding tray forward Holding tray separation Multifeeder pick up Developing Regist roller drive Cassette 3 pick up Vertical path roller 3 drive Cassette 4 pick up Vertical path roller 4 drive Vertical path roller 1 dr...

Page 670: ...PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 139 Figure 11 607 Table 11 607 CL14 M18 CL16 M19 Symbol CL M Name Motor Clutch Notation M18 M19 CL14 CL16 Function Right deck lifter drive Left deck lifter drive Right deck pick up Left deck pick up ...

Page 671: ...igure 11 608 DS3 DS2 LA1 DS1 H3 TP3 MFSVR LA2 TS2 VZ1 CNT2 CNT1 TP2 TH1 TH2 TP1 H2 H1 THHUM1 LF1 CB1 TH TS1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 140 ...

Page 672: ...2 TH THHUM1 TS1 TS2 VZ1 TP1 TP2 TP3 Function Circuit breaker Total copy counter Accessories copy counter Original size 1 detection Original size 2 detection Original size 3 detection Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Drum heater Scanning lamp Pre exposure lamp Noise filter Multifeeder paper width detecting VR Fixing heater main thermistor Fixing heater sub thermistor Drum heater thermistor Temp...

Page 673: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 142 F PCBs Figure 11 609 t 1 q 0 2 y u 3 i r e w o ...

Page 674: ...CB Accessories copy counter PCB Drum heater controller PCB AC driver PCB Lamp regulator PCB DC power supply PCB Service switch PCB Function Sequence control Control panel control Control panel key input LED indication Control panel back light lamp power supply High voltage output Holding tray sensor solenoid clutch control Photosensitive drum surface potential control Accessories copy counter sign...

Page 675: ...ANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 144 G Paper Deck A1 1 Sensors and Switches Figure 11 610a paper deck A1 SW102 Q107 Q104 Q106 Q110 Q108 Q102 Q103 SW100 Q105 SW103 ...

Page 676: ...h Notation Q102 Q103 Q104 Q105 Q106 Q107 Q108 Q110 SW100 SW102 SW103 Function Deck lifter upper limit detection Deck paper supply position detection Deck set detection Deck pick up guide open detection Deck vertical path paper detection Deck pick up paper detection Deck paper absent detection Deck lifter position detection Deck open switch Deck open detecting switch Deck lifter lower limit detecti...

Page 677: ...CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 146 2 Motors Clutches Solenoids and PCBs Figure 11 610b paper deck A1 M102 q w SL101 CL101 CL102 M101 SL102 ...

Page 678: ... JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 147 Symbol S L CL M Name Motor Clutch Solenoid PCB Notation M101 M102 CL101 CL102 SL101 SL102 q w Function Deck main motor Deck lifter motor Deck vertical path clutch Deck pick up clutch Deck pick up roller releasing solenoid Deck open solenoid Side deck driver PCB Open switch PCB ...

Page 679: ...ust not be used in the field Caution Those VRs and check pins not discussed herein are for use at the factory requiring special tools and high precision Do not touch them in the field 1 DC Controller PCB Figure 11 611 J101 J102 J103 J104 J105 J106 J107 J108 J109 J110 J111 J112 J113 J114 J115 J116 J117 J118 J119 J121 J122 J123 J125 J126 J128 J129 SW101 B12 B1 B9 B15 B1 B1 B1 B20 B10 B1 1 2 A1 A12 A...

Page 680: ... Ratio 200 0 141 1 122 4 115 4 100 0 86 5 81 6 70 7 50 0 SW101 2 OFF ON OFF ON SW101 3 Voltage 100V 230V 230V 120V Size vertical AB AB Inch A Inch Inch 4R3E 200 LTR 11 17 LGL 11 17 100 LGL LTR LGL 11 17 11 17 LTR 50 Ratio 200 0 129 4 121 4 100 0 78 6 73 3 64 7 50 0 Table 11 611 Caution DIP SW 101 3 on the DC controller is for use at the factory only do not touch it Otherwise the machine may malfun...

Page 681: ...Table 11 615 Table 11 616 A 2R2E 200 A4 A3 100 A3 A4 50 Ratio 200 0 141 4 100 0 70 7 50 0 AB Inch 4R4E 200 A4 LTR A3 B5 B4 A4 LTR B4 B4 A3 B5 A4 LTR 100 A3 B4 A4 LTR B5 B4 A4 LTR A3 A4 LTR B4 B5 50 Ratio 200 0 141 4 122 4 115 4 100 0 86 5 81 6 70 7 50 0 Connector J123 J125 J126 J129 Description For factory For factory For factory For factory ...

Page 682: ...7 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 151 2 AC Driver PCB Figure 11 612 3 DC Power Supply PCB Figure 11 613 J301 J302 J303 J304 J305 J306 J308 J309 J311 5 1 4 1 2 1 8 1 6 1 5 1 5 1 1 4 1 3 J643 1 2 J644 1 2 1 9 J642 J645 2 1 J641 4 1 ...

Page 683: ...C CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 152 4 Control CPU PCB Figure 11 614 J913 J912 J916 J915 J911 J923 J919 J920 1 16 1 15 B10 B1 A1 A10 1 9 1 2 14 1 18 1 18 1 ...

Page 684: ...350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 153 5 Holding Tray Driver PCB Figure 11 615 J201 J202 J203 J204 J205 J206 J207 J208 J209 J210 1 4 B13 B1 1 5 A1 A13 1 13 1 10 3 1 6 1 9 1 7 1 3 1 ...

Page 685: ...APAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 154 6 Potential Measurement PCB Figure 11 616 Table 11 617 Table 11 618 J3 J1 J2 VR2 LED1 1 4 1 5 1 4 VR1 VR VR1 VR2 Description For factory For factory LED LED1 Description ON while drum surface potential is being measured ...

Page 686: ...CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 155 7 HVT1 PCB Figure 11 617 Table 11 619 J301 J403 J203 J201 J202 1 3 1 10 4 1 1 5 VR201 1 2 VR VR201 Description For factory ...

Page 687: ...ANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 156 8 HVT2 PCB Figure 11 618 9 Inverter PCB Figure 11 619 J956 J955 2 1 1 4 T502 T501 J501 J404 J402 J401 2 1 ...

Page 688: ... 11 620 11 Counter PCB Figure 11 621 Table 11 620 J65 1 1 2 5 J63 1 2 ON SW931 J503 5 1 1 6 J501 SW931 1 0 1 0 1 SW931 2 0 0 1 1 Description Assumes that the sub counter is not connected Assumes that the sub counter is a small size copy counter Assumes that the sub counter is a two sided copy counter Assumes that the sub counter is a large size copy counter ...

Page 689: ...P6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 158 12 Side Deck Driver paper deck A1 Figure 11 622 J6 J3 J7 J8 SW1 J5 J9 J10 J11 J4 J103 1 2 B14 B1 A1 A14 1 9 1 1 3 11 1 13 1 1 6 1 2 1 6 2 ...

Page 690: ...rence When you have selected a mode you will find a specific page reference number in the upper right corner of the display COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 159 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Display DISPLAY I O DISPLAY ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION COUNTER Mode Display mode I O mode Adjustment mode Function mode Options mode C...

Page 691: ... End service mode Press the Reset key once to leave the current mode Press the Reset key twice to end service mode Service mode ends when you turn off the power switch or disconnect the power plug It will not end however when you open the front door or the pick up door C Using Adjustment Mode and Options Mode In adjustment mode and options mode the options made on the control panel are stored in t...

Page 692: ...REGIST LE_BLANK F_BLANK R_BLANK TE_BLANK PRIMARY BIAS PRETRANS TRN_1 TRN_DUP TRN_OVL SEP_1 SEP_DUP SEP_OVL C1_STMTR C1_A4R C2_STMTR C2_A4R C3_STMTR C3_A4R C4_STMTR C4_A4R MF_A6R MF_A4R MF_A4 BOOK_ERA ATM DOC_ST P_INT_RVL RFAE_F5L REAE_F9L RFAE_F5R RFAE_F9R LA_LCKPS LA_SPEED RF_LENSY 11 17PSZ LGL_PSZ LTR_PSZ LTRR_PSZ STMT_PSZ A3_PSZ A4_PSZ A4R_PSZ A5_PSZ B4_PSZ B5_PSZ B5R_PSZ TYP TYP ...

Page 693: ...del Indicates the activation voltage of the scanning lamp 230V model Indicates a value other than 0 if the primary pre transfer or transfer separation charging wire cleaner stops at a point other than home position The cleaner can at times return to home position when wire cleaning is executed in user mode Indicates 1 during current control of the primary charging assembly or when the current has ...

Page 694: ...ess you execute wire cleaning the associated operation is prohibited and the machine will not be reset even when the machine is turned off and on COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 163 Item LIFT Description Indicates 1 if the lifter position sensor does not turn on within 8 sec after the UP command for the li...

Page 695: ...tial of the drum Indicates the average surface potential during AE measurement Indicates the VL1 light area potential target value Indicates the VL1 light area potential measured value Indicates the VL2 developing bias light area potential measured value Indicates the VD dark area potential target value Indicates the VD dark area potential measured value Remarks Unit V Unit V Unit V Unit V Unit V ...

Page 696: ...PTC TC SC BIAS Description Indicates the current value of the primary charging assembly Indicates the grid current value of the primary charging assembly Indicates the current value of the pre transfer charging assembly Indicates the current value of the transfer charging assembly Indicates the current value of the separation charging assembly Indicates the DC value of the developing bias Remarks ...

Page 697: ...APON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 166 4 9 Item DCMET 1 DCMET 2 DCMET 3 DCMET 4 Description Indicates the output of the original size sensor 1 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 2 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 3 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 4 Remarks ...

Page 698: ... the locations of the third fourth and fifth most recent jams that occurred in the machine Indicates the sixth seventh and eighth most recent jams that occurred in the machine Not used Indicates the most recent self diagnosis code for the machine excluding RDF Indicates the second most recent self diagnosis code for the machine excluding RDF Indicates the third most recent self diagnosis code for ...

Page 699: ... indicated COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 168 Item DF JAM S JAM DF ERR 1 S ERR 1 DF ALM S ALM Description Indicates the location of the jam in RDF Indicates the location of the jam sorter Indicates the results of self diagnosis RDF 2 Indicates the result of self diagnosis sorter 3 Indicates the nature of ...

Page 700: ...0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 Notation PS24 PS33 PS36 PS27 PS30 PS17 PS14 PS8 PS9 PS23 PS15 PS47 PS10 PS49 PS12 3 PS52 4 Q107 Q106 Sensor Pick up vertical path 0 Pick up vertical path 1 Pick up vertical path 2 Pick up vertical path 3 Pick up vertical path 4 Holding tray pick up Holding tray registration Holding tray feeding assembly 1 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 Registration Holding tray inlet Fi...

Page 701: ... 05 06 07 09 0A Type Stapling down Staple jam Stapler safety mechanism ON Stapler over capacity Stapler capacity full Paper size mixed Bin inside paper Staple absent Resetting Run a self check Open the front door remove all staple jams and close the front door Open the front door remove all jams and close the front door Remove all sheets from the bins Remove all sheets from the bins Remove all she...

Page 702: ...ed in image composition mode Operation mode error RDF Stops Stops Stops Stops Counts up to 100 sheets and stops Stops Stops Stops Stops Resetting Turn on and off the original sensor S1 Turn on and off the original sensor S1 Turn on and off the original sensor S1 and open and close the RDF Turning on and off the original sensor S1 Turns on and off the original sensor S1 and open and close the RDF T...

Page 703: ...culating bar swings idly without coming into contact with an original Left pick up is executed The original left S3 and S4 with a discrepancy of 8 mm in timing Edge feeding is executed The entire original leaves S3 The pick up motor M1 turns on The original is fed for an equivalent of 500 mm S3 does not detect the original S2 detects an original The original is fed for an equivalent of 60 mm S3 do...

Page 704: ...irection 1 5 mm or more The original does not leave S19 The belt motor M3 rotates in reverse S5 detects an original Reversal starts S3 and S4 detect an original with a discrepancy of 10 mm or more in timing Reversal starts S3 detects paper Reversal starts The paper is fed for an equivalent of 163 mm from S5 S3 does not detect paper Reversal starts S3 and S4 detect an original with a discrepancy of...

Page 705: ...eration The copier sends a command for pick up when the RDF is not ready A large size original is detected in reduced page composition mode In stream reading the speed of the belt motor M3 when the leading edge of the original is at image exposure start position is below a specific value In stream reading the copier sends a command for an outside control speed for the belt motor M3 In stream readi...

Page 706: ...7 DF SORT Description Indicates the version of the ROM Q161 on the controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM Q160 on the controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM Q156 on the controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM Q140 on the DC controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM Q937 on the control panel PCB Indicates the version of the ROM IC2 on the RDF controller PCB Indicates...

Page 707: ...11 176 Item KEY CHK DF SIZE DOC SIZE DOC STS1 DOC STS2 Description Indicates the code of the key pressed on the control panel 1 Indicates the size of the original detected by the RDF Indicates the size of the original detected by the original size sensor of the copier Indicates the output 0 1 of the original size sensor of the copier 2 Indicates the output 0 1 of the original size sensor of the co...

Page 708: ...ircuit 1 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 177 Notation 00 0F 01 0F 02 0F 03 0F 04 0F Key Reset Stop Start 1 4 Notation 05 0F 06 0F 07 0F 08 0F 09 0F Key 7 Clear 2 5 8 Notation 0A 0F 0B 0F 0C 0F 0D 0F 0E 0F Key 0 3 6 9 ID Notation 0F 0F 10 0F 11 0F 12 0F Key Pre heat Interrupt User Mode Guide ...

Page 709: ...er width sensor output analog SW paper length sensor output 0 1 SIZE paper width mm Indicates the paper size sensor output and the width of the copy paper set in the cassette 2 WIDE paper width sensor output analog SW paper sensor output 0 1 SIZE paper width mm Indicates the paper size sensor output and the width of the copy paper set in the cassette 3 WIDE paper width sensor output analog SW pape...

Page 710: ... input and output ports Screen 2 1 Convert the bit data into hexadecimal data when making in terms of analog data for example address P023 photosensitive drum potential signal 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 179 ...

Page 711: ...er deck type only Left deck lifter drive motor drive signal paper deck type only Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch drive signal Vertical path roller 2 drive clutch rive signal Right deck pick up roller releasing solenoid drive signal Address P000 00 P000 01 P000 02 P000 03 P000 04 P000 05 P000 06 P000 07 P000 08 P000 09 P000 10 P000 11 P000 12 P000 13 P000 14 P000 15 Signal M2ON M1ON FM5D DEVCD ...

Page 712: ...vertical path roller 4 drive clutch drive signal Cassette 3 pick up roller releasing solenoid drive signal Cassette 4 pick up roller releasing solenoid drive signal Fixing assembly inlet guide drive signal Wire cleaning motor HP signal Size detection drive Address P001 00 P001 01 P001 02 P001 03 P001 04 P001 05 P001 06 P001 07 P001 08 P001 09 P001 10 P001 11 P001 12 P001 13 P001 14 P001 15 Signal ...

Page 713: ...l signal Original size 1 detection signal Original size 2 detection signal Original size 3 A detection signal Original size 3 B detection signal Not used Address P002 00 P002 01 P002 02 P002 03 P002 04 P002 05 P002 06 P002 07 P002 08 P002 09 P002 10 P002 11 P002 12 P002 13 P002 14 P002 15 Signal PS24D SCDP2 RGPD PS9D PS8D MFS SHOND MHOND WTFL DTEP TEP DSZ1 DSZ2 DSZ3A DSZ3B Jack J116B 7 J111A 8 J10...

Page 714: ...lectrode bias output signal Pre transfer separation AC output signal Scanning lamp ON signal Fixing main heater drive signal Fixing sub heater drive signal Address P003 00 P003 01 P003 02 P003 03 P003 04 P003 05 P003 06 P003 07 P003 08 P003 09 P003 10 P003 11 P003 12 P003 13 P003 14 P003 15 Signal LDPURR CCXNTD HVTRMT CCNTD FM6D FM6D FM2D FM3D FM2D POT S ON MFRLSD BIASAC PSTBIAS PSTAC SPAC LAON MH...

Page 715: ... Control panel CPU reset signal Internal signal watch dog Power switch OFF signal FT prohibit signal Not used Internal signal tray X shift start Internal signal tray Y shift start Address P004 00 P004 01 P004 02 P004 03 P004 04 P004 05 P004 06 P004 07 P004 08 P004 09 P004 10 P004 11 P004 12 P004 13 P004 14 P004 15 Signal M03BK M03FW M03ON M03CL M03MD0 M03MD1 M03MD2 B0V LCDGHT OPRST PWOFF PWOFF Jac...

Page 716: ...tection Holding tray unit detection signal Power switch ON detection signal Control card detection signal Internal signal encoder error detection Address P005 00 P005 01 P005 02 P005 03 P005 04 P005 05 P005 06 P005 07 P005 08 P005 09 P005 10 P005 11 P005 12 P005 13 P005 14 P005 15 Signal FDOD FFUCNT IDPD MFDC EXDPD CBOP PS15D PS14D FXDEL PS17D HTLPD HTCNT SW1ON CCNNT Jack J104A 3 J108A 2 J108B 12 ...

Page 717: ...ever motor drive signal Holding tray registration clutch drive signal Holding tray separation clutch drive signal Holding tray forward clutch drive signal Holding tray reversing clutch drive signal Address P006 00 P006 01 P006 02 P006 03 P006 04 P006 05 P006 06 P006 07 P006 08 P006 09 P006 10 P006 11 P006 12 P006 13 P006 14 P006 15 Signal M10ON PEXP M11ON DHRD TCNTD OPCNTD FM8D FM8D FXDSD SL14 DPD...

Page 718: ...signal Pick up vertical path 2 paper detection signal Right deck lifter position sensor signal Left deck lifter position sensor signal Address P007 00 P007 01 P007 02 P007 03 P007 04 P007 05 P007 06 P007 07 P007 08 P007 09 P007 10 P007 11 P007 12 P007 13 P007 14 P007 15 Signal RUPDOP RLWDOP CBCC SCHP RDEOP LDEOP C1PL0 C1PL1 C2PL0 C2PL1 RDPD LDPD PS33D PS36D RDLTP LDLTP Jack J119B 4 J119B 7 J112A 4...

Page 719: ...ing assembly temperature error detection Internal signal CVR error detection Internal signal SSR error detection Internal signal power supply switch open circuit detection Internal signal total copy counter open circuit detection Internal signal accessory counter open circuit detection Address P008 00 P008 01 P008 02 P008 03 P008 04 P008 05 P008 06 P008 07 P008 08 P008 09 P008 10 P008 11 P008 12 P...

Page 720: ...P009 04 P009 05 P009 06 P009 07 Signal HTFCNT FXCJS SSWON SCLK LEXTPD C3SS C4SS Jack J119A 2 J108A 19 J106B 5 J114A 14 J121B 5 J117B 7 J130B 7 J108A 9 Remarks 0 connected 1 paper present 1 ON 1 locked 1 paper present 1 open 0 closed 1 open 0 closed 1 error Notation HT PS52 SSW1 PS48 PS49 PS50 PS51 TH2 Description Not used Holding tray feeding 2 clutch drive signal Fixing feeding unit locking solen...

Page 721: ...on Internal signal digit Internal signal digit Internal signal digit Internal signal digit Not used Not used Not used Not used Address P012 00 P012 01 P012 02 P012 03 P012 04 P012 05 P012 06 P012 07 Signal Jack J125 1 J125 2 J125 3 J125 4 Remarks Notation Description Internal signal key return Internal signal key return Internal signal key return Internal signal key return Internal signal key retu...

Page 722: ...dth signal analog Cassette 1 paper width signal Cassette 2 paper width signal Photosensitive drum potential signal analog Cassette 3 paper width signal Cassette 4 paper width signal Not used Address P020 P021 P022 P023 P024 P025 P026 Signal C1PW C2PW POT C3PW C4PW Jack J115B 4 J130B 10 J130A 12 J103B 9 J117B 10 J117A 12 Remarks Notation SVR1 SVR4 SVR5 SVR2 SVR3 ...

Page 723: ...M7 excitation A signal Stopper motor M7 excitation B signal Stopper motor M7 drive signal AE sensor discharging signal Edge detection signal Cooling fan M9 drive signal Re circulating motor M4 drive signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Address P027 00 P027 01 P027 02 P027 03 P027 04 P027 05 P027 06 P027 07 P028 00 P028 01 P028 02 P028 03 P028 04 P028 05 P028 06 P028 07 P029 00 P029 ...

Page 724: ...gnal Reversing motor M2 mode 0 signal Reversing motor M2 mode 1 signal D A converter serial communication clock signal Delivery motor clock detection signal S12 Not used Not used Internal signal sensor sensitivity switch signal 2 Internal signal sensor sensitivity switch signal 1 Reversing motor M2 drive signal Belt motor clock detection signal S11 Feeding motor clock detecting signal S22 Pick up ...

Page 725: ...signal DIP switch 1 6 detection signal DIP switch 1 7 detection signal Right cover open closed detection signal S23 S24 Not used Not used Not used Not used Push switch 1 detection signal Push switch 2 detection signal Push switch 3 detection signal Left cover open closed detection signal S13 S14 Not used Not used Not used Not used Re circulating lever hold detection signal RDF open detection signa...

Page 726: ...position detection signal 1 S8 Skew detection signal 2 S16 Paper pick up signal 2 S15 Power drop monitor signal Stopper home position sensor S26 Tray position detection signal S25 Not used Original set LED ON signal LED1 ON signal LED2 ON signal LED3 ON signal Not used Not used Not used Matrix digit 0 signal Matrix digit 1 signal Matrix digit 2 signal Matrix digit 3 signal Matrix common 0 signal M...

Page 727: ...ding motor mode 2 signal Skew detection signal 1 S4 Manual feed registration detection signal S19 Original detection signal 1 S1 Original detection signal 2 S27 Pick up detection signal 1 S2 Reversal detection signal S5 Delivery detection signal S6 Power drop monitor signal internal Belt motor current control DA signal Reversing motor current control DA signal AE sensor LED O DA signal AE sensor L...

Page 728: ...N CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 197 Address P056 P057 P058 P059 P060 Description Image leading edge sensor S20 DA signal Manual feed set sensor S32 DA signal Original sensor 2 S27 DA signal Not used Original detection VA resistance VR1 Signal Jack Remarks Hexadecimal 4 digits Hexadecimal 4 digits Notation ...

Page 729: ...M6 control signal 1 Reference wall drive motor M6 control signal 2 Non sort paper detection signal PI3 Reference wall home position signal PI13 Sort paper detection signal PI4 Guide bar home position signal PI16 Multi guide drive motor control signal 1 M5 Multi guide drive motor control signal 1 M5 Address P062 00 P062 01 P062 02 P062 03 P062 04 P062 05 P062 06 P062 07 P063 00 P063 01 P063 02 P063...

Page 730: ...r M1 CCW rotation Stapler unit claw releasing solenoid SL5 drive signal Paper path switching solenoid SL1 drive signal Paper retaining solenoid SL3 drive signal Stapler unit position claw releasing solenoid SL5 drive signal Stapler motor M2 CCW rotation signal Stapler motor M2 CW rotation signal Address P064 00 P064 01 P064 02 P064 03 P064 04 P064 05 P064 06 P064 07 P065 00 P065 01 P065 02 P065 03...

Page 731: ...ent analog input signal Feeding motor speed control analog input signal Matrix digit output signal 0 Matrix digit output signal 1 Matrix digit output signal 2 Matrix digit output signal 3 Matrix digit output signal 4 Matrix SEG output signal 0 Matrix SEG output signal 1 Matrix SEG output signal 2 Address P066 00 P066 01 P066 02 P066 03 P066 04 P066 05 P066 06 P066 07 P067 00 P067 01 P067 02 P067 0...

Page 732: ...tapler unit swing prohibit position signal MSW2 Stapler unit orientation position 2 signal S1 Stapler unit orientation position 1 signal S1 Paper retaining signal PI11 Not used Multi guide drive motor reference wall drive motor drive signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Address P072 00 P072 01 P072 02 P072 03 P072 04 P072 05 P072 06 P072 07 P073 00 P073 01 P073 02 P073 03 P...

Page 733: ...gnal Front access key LED ON signal Stapling position LED3 ON signal Staple key LED ON signal DIP switch 1 4 detection signal DIP switch 1 3 detection signal DIP switch 1 2 detection signal DIP switch 1 1 detection signal Joint signal PI1 Not used Not used Not used Address P075 00 P075 01 P075 02 P075 03 P075 04 P075 05 P075 06 P075 07 P076 00 P076 01 P076 02 P076 03 P076 04 P076 05 P076 06 P076 0...

Page 734: ...etection signal MSW1 Stapler unit swing position signal PI10 Not used Not used Not used Front access key check signal Shift down key check signal Bin home position signal PI18 PCB check signal Front door open internal signal Not used Not used Not used Address P077 00 P077 01 P077 02 P077 03 P077 04 P077 05 P077 06 P077 07 P078 00 P078 01 P078 02 P078 03 P078 04 P078 05 P078 06 P078 07 P079 00 P079...

Page 735: ...D2 ON signal Not used Bin paper sensor 2 S7 A D input Stapler internal paper sensor S5 A D input Bin internal sensor S4 A D input Feeding motor current M1 A D input Feeding motor speed control M1 A D input Stapler internal paper sensor S5 D A output Swing motor current M4 D A output Staple unit shift motor current M3 D A output Address P080 00 P080 01 P080 02 P080 03 P080 04 P080 05 P080 06 P080 0...

Page 736: ...rter E2 8 8 Description Bin shift motor current M9 D A output Guide bar drive motor current M8 D A output Bin paper light adjustment S4 D A output Push bar drive motor current M7 Bin paper sensor 2 light adjustment S7 D A output Address P091 00 07 P092 00 07 P093 00 07 P094 00 07 P095 00 07 Remarks Hexadecimal 4 digits Jack Signal Notation ...

Page 737: ...sed Not used Not used Not used Not used Bin paper sensor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not sued Not used Not used Bin paper sensor 24V detection Bin HP sensor connector detection Lead cam sensor connector detection Bin shift clock sensor connector detection Guide bar HP sensor connector detection Not used Not used Address P062 00 P062 01 P062 02 P062 03 P062 04 P062 05 P062...

Page 738: ...k sensor Not used Bin shift motor clock sensor Guide bar swing motor control signal Feeding motor PWM signal Feeding motor brake signal Bin shift motor PWM signal Bin shift motor drive singal Paper path switching solenoid drive signal Not used Paper retaining plate solenoid drive signal Bin shift motor UP signal Address P065 00 P065 01 P065 02 P065 03 P065 04 P065 05 P065 06 P065 07 P066 00 P066 0...

Page 739: ... sensor D A output 0 Bin paper sensor D A output 1 Bin paper sensor D A output 2 Bin paper sensor D A output 3 Bin paper sensor D A output 4 Bin paper sensor D A output 5 Bin paper sensor D A output 6 Bin paper sensor D A output 7 Joint sensor Door sensor Not used Not used Sort sensor Non sort sensor Not used Not used Not used Address P068 00 P068 01 P068 02 P068 03 P068 04 P068 05 P068 06 P068 07...

Page 740: ...103B 3 J103B 4 J103A 1 J103A 2 J108B 19 J108A 1 Remarks 1 0 CW rotation 0 1 CCW rotation 1 0 CW rotation 0 1 CCW rotation 1 0 CW rotation 0 1 CCW rotation 1 HP Notation M12 M13 M06 Description Not used Pre transfer charging wire cleaner home position signal Transfer separation charging wire cleaner home position signal Not used Holding tray Y motor hold signal Holding tray Y motor phase A signal H...

Page 741: ...WM signal Not used Address P100 00 P100 01 P100 02 P100 03 P100 04 P100 05 P100 06 P100 07 Signal M09A M09B HTXHP HTYHP M04ACM M04BCM M04A Jack J113B 2 J113B 4 J113A 10 J113B 1 J110A 3 J110A 6 J110A 1 J110A 2 J111B 7 Remarks 1 HP Notation M09 M09 PS20 PS21 M04 M04 Description Lens X motor phase B signal Lens Y motor hold signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Address P101 00 ...

Page 742: ...Address P102 00 P102 01 P102 02 P102 03 P102 04 P102 05 P102 06 P102 07 Signal M05A M05B LXHP LYHP Jack J110A 10 J110A 11 J110A 13 J110A 14 J110A 8 J110B 2 Remarks 1 HP 1 HP Notation M05 M05 PS06 PS07 Description Not used Not used Internal signal holding tray X shift start Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Address P104 00 P104 01 P104 02 P104 03 P104 04 P104 05 P104 06 P104 07 Signal Ja...

Page 743: ...P118 05 P118 06 P118 07 Signal Jack Remarks Notation Description Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Digit 1 input Address P119 00 P119 01 P119 02 P119 03 P119 04 P119 05 P119 06 P119 07 Signal Jack Remarks Notation Description Digit 2 input Digit 2 input Digit 2 input Digit 2 input Digit 2 input Digit 2 input Digit 2 input Digit 2 inpu...

Page 744: ...P122 01 P122 02 P122 03 P122 04 P122 05 P122 06 P122 07 Signal DLUP DLMON DOLON DPRSD DPUCD DVPCD DMON DMDS Jack J2001A 5 J2001A 6 J2001A 7 J2001A 8 J2001A 9 J2001A 10 J2001A 11 J2001A 12 Remarks 1 UP 1 ON 1 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 double speed Notation M102 M102 LED100 SL101 CL102 CL101 M101 M101 Description Deck pick up guide open detection signal Deck set detection Deck main motor drive detect...

Page 745: ...tection signal Deck vertical path paper detection signal Deck main motor brake signal Not used Deck open solenoid drive signal Not used Address P124 00 P124 01 P124 02 P124 03 P124 04 P124 05 P124 06 P124 07 Signal DPSP DPE DPPD DVPD DMBRK DOPSD Jack J2001B 1 J2001B 2 J2001B 3 J2001B 4 J2001B 5 J2001B 6 Remarks 1 0 paper supply position 1 paper present 1 paper detection 1 paper detection 1 brake 0...

Page 746: ... GLEAM 5 Description Use it to adjust the reference activation voltage for the scanning lamp used during copying Use it to adjust the reference activation voltage for the scanning lamp used during copying in photo mode Use it to adjust the intensity used when copying a newspaper original in AE mode Use it to adjust the degree of optimum exposure Settings 35 35 35 35 0 1023 53 139 Remarks A higher ...

Page 747: ...scription Use it to adjust the degree of braking used when the scanner is moving in reverse Use it to adjust the leading edge margin used during copying registration Settings 0 100 100 100 Remarks A higher setting increases the degree of braking A higher setting delays the timing at which the registration roller turns on decreasing the leading edge margin Unit 0 1 mm ...

Page 748: ...se it to adjust the front margin blank exposure lamp activation period Use it to increase the rear margin blank exposure lamp activation period Use it to adjust the trailing edge non image width blank exposure activation period Settings 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Remarks A higher setting increases the leading edge non image width A higher setting increases the front margin A higher setting de...

Page 749: ... factory enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB Use it to adjust the developing assembly bias It is pre adjusted at the factory enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB Use it to adjust the current for the pre transfer charging assembly It is pre adjusted at the factory enter the value recorded on the...

Page 750: ...e label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB Use it to adjust the current 2nd side of two sided for the transfer charging assembly It is pre adjusted at the factory enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB Use it to adjust the current 2nd side of overlay for the transfer charging assembly It is pre adjusted at the factory enter the value record...

Page 751: ...vice label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB Use it to adjust the current 2nd side of two sided for the separation charging assembly It is pre adjusted at the factory enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB Use it to adjust the current 2nd side of overlay for the separation charging assembly It is pre adjusted at the factory enter the value...

Page 752: ... enter the paper width basic value STMTR for the cassette 1 Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A4R for the cassette 1 Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value STMTR for the cassette 3 Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A4R for the cassette 2 Settings 000 255 000 255 000 255 000 255 Remarks 100V model only 100V model only 100V model ...

Page 753: ...ription Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value STMR for the cassette 3 Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A4R for the cassette 3 Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value STMTR for the cassette 4 Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A4R for the cassette 4 Settings 000 255 000 255 000 255 000 255 Remarks ...

Page 754: ...1 223 9 17 Item MF A6R MF A4R MF A4 Description Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A6R for the multifeeder Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A4R for the multifeeder Use it to fine adjust or enter the paper width basic value A4 for the multifeeder Settings 000 255 000 255 000 255 Remarks ...

Page 755: ...rame erasing Use it to select an operating environ ment in relation to atmospheric pressure 0 1 to 0 75 atm up to altitude of 2500 m 1 0 75 to 0 70 atm up to altitude of 2500 to 3000 m 2 0 70 to 0 65 atm up to altitude of from 3000 to 3500 m Settings 10 30 0 2 Remarks Unit 1 mm A higher setting increases the margin A low atmospheric pressure tends to cause leakage lower the target potential for po...

Page 756: ...N JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 225 11 17 Item DOC ST P INTRVL Description Us it to adjust the original stop position for the RDF The RDF will switch position for left right and manual feed pick up mechanisms Use it to adjust the original to original distance for the RDF 2 on 1 mode The RDF will switch position for left and right pick up mechanisms Settings 1023 1023 1023 10...

Page 757: ... up in AE mode Use it to adjust the RDF newspaper original intensity left pick up in AE mode Use it to adjust the RDF scanning lamp reference activation voltage right pick up in AE mode Use it to adjust the RDF newspaper original intensity right pick up in AE mode Settings 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 Remarks A higher setting makes the slope gentle A higher setting makes the slope steep...

Page 758: ...he memory on the RDF controller PCB the operation will be as follows Operation 1 If you enter 5 for DOC ST in place of the existing 2 5 2 3 shifting the original stop position by 3 Operation 2 If you enter 7 for P INTRVL in place of the existing 5 7 5 2 changing the sheet to sheet distance by 2 3 These items relate to SW1 on the RDF controller PCB pick up and delivery settings will be by the user ...

Page 759: ...it to adjust the offset in the lens Y direction in right pick up mode of the RDF D1 adjusting the displacement of the lens reference position in right pick up mode in relation to left pick up mode Settings 2300 2500 1023 1023 50 50 Remarks A higher setting advances the timing at which registration turns on thereby increasing the margin A higher setting increases the speed thereby contracting the i...

Page 760: ... paper jogging guide plate swing duplexing unit for each paper size Use the item if pick up faults occur or paper moves askew when pick up is from the duplexing unit or in two sided overlay copying Settings 10 10 Remarks 1 step 0 183 mm 2 For each step the change will affect both front and rear paper jogging plates so that a single step results in a change of 0 367 mm A negative value decreases th...

Page 761: ...er jogging guide plate swing duplexing unit for each paper size Use the item if pick up faults occur or paper moves askew when pick up is from the duplexing unit or in two sided overlay copying Settings 10 10 Remarks 1 step 0 183 mm 2 For each step the change will affect both front and rear paper jogging plates so that a single step results in a change of 0 366 mm A negative value decreases the sw...

Page 762: ...he paper jogging guide plate swing duplexing unit for each paper size Use the item if pick up faults occur or paper moves askew when pick up is from the duplexing unit or in two sided overlay copying Settings 10 10 Remarks 1 step 0 183 mm 2 For each step the change will affect both front and rear paper jogging plates so that a single step results in a change of 0 366 mm A negative value decreases ...

Page 763: ...aper jogging guide plate swing duplexing unit for each paper size Use the item if pick up faults occur or paper moves askew when pick up is from the duplexing unit or in two sided overlay copying Settings 10 10 Remarks 1 step 0 183 mm 2 For each step the change will affect both front and rear paper jogging plates so that a single step results in a change of 0 366 mm A negative value decreases the ...

Page 764: ...ey If the developing assembly has been installed press the OK key on the touch panel and then press the key 4 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 233 1 11 Item TONER S Description Use it to supply toner during machine installation The duration of supply will be indicated in seconds normally it takes 7 to 9 min...

Page 765: ...JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 234 2 11 Item ERROR Description Use it to initialize E000 E001 E002 E003 E005 E013 E020 jam history error history sorter jam RDF jam or alarm history However initializing E000 or the like will not initialize the jam history Remarks ...

Page 766: ...1 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 235 3 11 Item DISP LED LCD CHK SCANLAMP Description Use it to turn on the LEDs on the control panel Use it to turn on the LCD on the control panel The LCD back light will turn off for 3 sec and then will turn on Use it to turn on the scanning lamp At this time the scanner cooling fan will also operate Remarks The lam...

Page 767: ...HPPR MTR BK ROT Description Use it to turn on the blanking exposure lamp Use it to turn on the pre exposure LED Use it to turn on the hopper motor M10 and M11 rotate at the same time Use it to turn on the developing cylinder Remarks The lamp will remain on for 3 sec The LED will remain on for 3 sec The motor operates for 3 sec The cylinder operates for about 2 min ...

Page 768: ...ULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 237 5 11 Item AE ADJ Description Use it to execute density measurement level automatic adjustment for AE mode If 0 is indicated set an F5 original If 1 is indicated set an F9 original Remarks ...

Page 769: ...OUBLESHOOTING 11 238 6 11 Item NIP PO CONT Description Use it to execute nip automatic measurement for the fixing roller A solid black image will automatically be made and stopped at the fixing roller it will automatically be discharged in 20 sec Use it to turn on and off potential control Remarks See p 11 40 1 OFF 0 ON ...

Page 770: ...G 11 239 7 11 Item C1 STMTR C1 A4R C2 STMTR C2 A4R Description Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 STMTR for the cassette 1 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 A4R for the cassette 2 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 STMTR for the cassette 2 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper ...

Page 771: ... JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 240 8 11 Item C3 STMTR C3 A4R C4 STMTR C4 A4R Description Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 STMTR for the cassette 3 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 A4R for the cassette 3 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 STMTR for the cassette 4 Use it to execut...

Page 772: ...riable resistor output COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 241 9 11 Item MF A6R MF A4R MF A4 Description Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 A6R for the multifeeder Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 A4R for the multifeeder Use it to exec...

Page 773: ...0 even after you have executed START To find out whether the item is being executed or not refer to LEDs 1 2 and 3 on the RDF controller PCB flashing in sequence or simultaneously COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 242 10 11 Item RFSKEW RF AE RFSE INT S BCLN Description Use it to execute skew adjustment of th...

Page 774: ...6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 243 11 11 Item RAM INIT Description Use it to initialize the RAM on the DC controller PCB Remarks After initialization the screen changes to the Copying Standard screen ...

Page 775: ...REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 244 1 9 Item SHUT OFF DENS ID SIZE DET COIN SET Description Use it to turn on or off the auto shut off function Use it to change the copy density notation Use it to turn on or off the size detection function Use it to change the notation for the control card indicated on the control panel between coin or copy card Rema...

Page 776: ... select any available space in the current mode 2 Use CALL SW under OPTION in service mode 5 initially 0 0 Do not use for call function all for mode memory 1 9 Use for call function as selected copy mode storage 3 A mode may be called back as in mode memory No storage occurs in a jam alarm interrupt or start after interruption state If the setting is 3 7 of mode memory copying mode used initially ...

Page 777: ...HT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 246 3 9 Item M NOTATI Description Use it to change the paper size choices for the multifeeder Remarks ...

Page 778: ...e it to select the RDF s AE or the copier s AE Normally the RDF s AE is used when the RDF is in use select the copier s AE if the RDF s AE fails for some reason Note Stream reading is not executed if the RDF s AE is disabled Use it to turn on and off stream reading Use it to enable or disable detection for auto paper selection for a mix of AB and Inch originals detec tion for a AB Inch mix e g A4 ...

Page 779: ...ed as U Use it to select the paper notation if universal cassette notation U NOTARI is set to 1 0 FLSC indicated as FLSC 1 OFI indicated as OFI 2 E OFI indicated as OFI 3 A LGL indicated as LGL 4 S OFI indicated as OFI Use it to select the paper notation if universal cassette notation U NOTARI is set to 1 0 G LGL indicated as LGL 1 FOLI indicated as FOLI 2 A FLS indicated as FLSC Use it to select ...

Page 780: ...tial VDT if the solid black on copies is too light Use it to turn on or off the sequence used to lower the copying speed to maintain fixing in low temperature conditions Use it to lower the fixing temperature Remarks 0 fuzzy control ON 1 if image is light because of high humidity 2 if average humidity 3 if cleaner separation claw and copy paper come into contact because of low humidity press 0 1 2...

Page 781: ...ixing roller is 75 C or less Even under normal operating conditions set it to 1 or 2 if the humidity increases at night to cause image faults Use it to switch the toner supply sequence by the humidity sensor Use it to enable or disable messages always or only when in service mode Add Fixing Cleaning Belt and Waste Toner Full Remarks 0 OFF no idle rotation 1 ON control at IDL MODE setting 0 auto co...

Page 782: ... with F POT SW 0 changed to 1 0 if image ratio of originals text is low 1 if image ratio of originals photo is high 2 not used usually but re transfer white spot at 50 mm along leading edge occurs The degree of separation current is highest at 0 and lowest at 2 Enter 1 if the environment sensor is faulty Control is with reference to the input in F HUM D instead of the output of the humidity sensor...

Page 783: ...sidering the paper size and the selected ratio Use it to specify two sided mode as the standard mode one sided to two sided If 0 is selected the notation two sided will not be indicated unless initialize standard mode is selected in user mode Use it to register a non default size for the multifeeder Note Copies may be made only when the sorter is not installed Otherwise a sorter jam will occur bec...

Page 784: ...e Large size copy copy counter for multifeeder 300 mm long or more or non default size Large size copy copy counter for cassette 1 no counting if front paper deck type 300 mm long or more or non default size Large size copy copy counter for cassette 2 not counting front paper deck type 300 mm long or more or non default size Large size copy copy counter for cassette 3 300 mm long or more or non de...

Page 785: ...escription Large size copy copy counter 2nd side of overlay 300 mm long or more or non default size Large size copy copy counter 2nd size of two sided 300 mm long or more or non default size Large size original feed counter 300 mm long or more or non default size Remarks After 99999999 returns to 00000000 After 99999999 returns to 00000000 After 99999999 returns to 00000000 ...

Page 786: ...r deck type less than 300 mm long or non default size Small size copy copy counter for cassette 2 left deck not counting front paper deck type less than 300 mm long or non default size Small size copy copy counter for cassette 3 less than 300 mm long or non default size Small size copy counter for cassette 4 less than 300 mm long or non default size Copy counter for paper deck A1 less than 300 mm ...

Page 787: ... S DF Description Small size copy copy counter 2nd side of overlay less than 300 mm long or non default size Small size copy copy counter 2nd side of two sided less than 300 mm long or non default size Small size original feed counter less than 300 mm long Remarks After 99999999 returns to 00000000 After 99999999 returns to 00000000 After 99999999 returns to 00000000 ...

Page 788: ...ing belt alarm is issued when service mode starts after having made 250 000 copies using the data Copy counter for after disposing of the waste toner from the case alarm is issued when service mode starts after having made 250 000 copies using the data Counter for RDF left pick up Counter for RDF right pick up Counter for copier and sorter jams Counter for feeder jams Remarks After 99999999 return...

Page 789: ...r is installed w OVERLAY 2_SIDE overlay two sided copy when the sheet is discharged outside the machine e MULTI CST when the sheet is discharged outside the machine 1st side of an overlay two sided copy when the sheet is stacked on the holding tray r RDF when the original is pulled in and its size is identified COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME A...

Page 790: ...1 poor contact Fixing heater H1 H2 open circuit Thermal switch TS1 open circuit SSR fault DC controller PCB fault SSR fault DC controller PCB fault Cleaning belt for the fixing assembly taken up Cleaning belt sensor PS11 fault DC controller PCB fault Connector for fixing assembly fault rear DC controller PCB fault Description The temperature of the upper fixing roller does not reach 70 C within 3 ...

Page 791: ...ses are not received every 1 sec The waste toner feeding screw cannot rotate and the switch MSW4 is pressed several times within a specific period of time After the pick up motor drive signal has been generated 2 or more pulses are not received every 1 sec During copying the toner supply signal is 0 toner absent for 2 min or more During installation the toner supply signal does not go 1 in 10 min ...

Page 792: ...ion signal HTYHP is generated for 2 sec or more The scanner home position signal SCHP is not generated within 10 sec after the power switch or the Copy Start key has been turned ON The scanner motor clock pulse signal SCMCLK is not generated even though the scanner motor is rotating While the scanner motor M3 drive signal is being generated the scan ner home position signal SCHP is generated for 0...

Page 793: ...standby the scanning lamp turns on During copying the scanning lamp turns off The lamp ON detection signal CVRON is generated although the scanning lamp ON signal LAON is 0 There is an error in the communication between the microprocessor master Q156 and the microprocessor slave Q140 on the DC controller PCB An error has occurred in the communication between the master Q156 on the microprocessor o...

Page 794: ...5 E013 and E020 you must initialize the data in the RAM on the DC controller PCB 1 Start service mode 2 Using the or key select ERROR 3 Press user mode to clear the indication 4 The message panel on the control panel will be refreshed and the Copy Mode screen will return 2 For E015 E202 and E204 you can make checks in reference to B ERR1 B ERR2 and B ERR3 in service mode 1 4 COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON I...

Page 795: ... fault Original sensor 1 S1 fault Original sensor 2 S27 fault Description The communication is monitored at all times The error occurs when there is an interruption for 5 sec Initialization does not end in 2 sec The flat face of the pick up roller D cut roller is at top and is at home position The number of belt motor clock pulses within 100 msec is less than specified The number of reversal motor...

Page 796: ...JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 265 When the self diagnosis has turned on you can reset the machine by turning it off once If the RDF is out of order disconnect the lattice connector on the RDF side open the RDF and set the original on the copyboard glass to continue to make copies Note ...

Page 797: ...tor drive signal has been generated the operation does not end in 2 sec After the motor drive signal has been generated the operation does not end in 2 sec After the motor drive signal has been generated the operation does not end in 2 sec The bin paper sensor cannot be adjusted automatically or the automatic adjustment setting has an error The bin paper sensor S6 S7 cannot be adjusted automatical...

Page 798: ...dicates the message Mode Not Available if a mode requiring the sorter is selected After the copier started down state you may turn it off and then on if the results of the self check it runs in response are good it will be reset with the sorter connected You need not detach the sorter from the copier Code Cause Stapler unit shift motor M3 fails Stapler paper sensor automatic adjustment fault Bin s...

Page 799: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 268 ...

Page 800: ...51 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON APPENDIX A GENERAL TIMING CHART A 1 B SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS A 2 C GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 5 D PAPER DECK A1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 7 E SPECIAL TOOLS LIST A 9 F SOLVENTS AND OILS A 10 ...

Page 801: ...rging assembly DC Pre transfer charging assembly AC Transfer charging assembly Separation charging assembly Developing bias DC Developing bias AC Pre exposure lamp LED Blanking exposure lamp LED Scanning lamp Surface potential measurement Charging wire cleaning motor Scanner motor M3 Scanner home position sensor PS1 Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor PS3 Developing clutch Right deck pick up cl...

Page 802: ...L16 Belt motor M3 Image leading edge signal Reversing motor M2 Reversal sensor S5 Delivery motor M5 Delivery sensor S6 Feeding motor M1 Sorter paper path sensor PI4 Guide bar motor M8 Stapler unit shift motor M3 Stapler swing motor M4 Staple swing stop position sensor MSW2 Stapler motor M2 Paper retaining solenoid SL3 Bin shift motor M9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2...

Page 803: ... DRIVE command HALF SPEED FM2D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command FULL SPEED FM3D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command FULL SPEED FM5D DEVELOPING UNIT COOLING FAN DRIVE command FM6D FEEDER FAN DRIVE command FM7D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command FULL SPEED FM8D SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN DRIVE command FXCJS FIXING ASSEMBLY CLAW JAM signal FXDEL FIXING UNIT DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signal FXDSD FIXING UNIT DRIVE SOLENOID command ...

Page 804: ...al PS24D PICK UP VERTICAL PATH 0 PAPER DETECT signal PS27D PICK UP VERTICAL PATH 3 PAPER DETECT signal PS30D PICK UP VERTICAL PATH 4 PAPER DETECT signal PS33D PICK UP VERTICAL PATH 1 PAPER DETECT signal PS36D PICK UP VERTICAL PATH 2 PAPER DETECT signal PS8D HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 1 PAPER DETECT signal PS9D HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 2 PAPER DETECT signal PTCLHP PRE TRANSFER CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION...

Page 805: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A 5 C GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM not available ...

Page 806: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A 6 ...

Page 807: ...A 7 not available D PAPER DECK A1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ...

Page 808: ...COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC CANON NP6350 NP6251 REV 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON A 8 ...

Page 809: ...onment sensor checking tool Tool number TKN 0093 CK 0054 FY9 3011 FY9 3012 FY9 3014 Shape No 1 2 3 4 5 Rank A A B B B Remarks Use to clean the fixing roller 10 packs box Use to adjust the No 1 and No 2 mirror position front and rear in a pair Use to check the potential sensor Use to check the environment sensor Front door Point of use TKN 0464 000 CLEANNING OIL HUILE DE NETTOYAGE CANON INC JAPAN J...

Page 810: ...leaning e g metal oil or toner Lubricating e g fixing drive assemblies Lubricating scanner rail spring clutch Lubricating plastic drive and friction parts No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Do not bring near open fire Procure localy Isopropyl alcohol may be substituted Do not bring near fire Procure locally CK 0427 500 g can CK 0451 100 cc CK 0524 100 cc CK 0562 20 g Composition C2H5O CHZ3 2 CHOH CH3COC2H...

Page 811: ...by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION CANON INC Printed in Japan REVISION 0 JULY 1997 18723 5 1 Hakusan 7 chome Toride shi Ibaraki 302 Japan ...

Page 812: ...PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON 0797S2 11 1 This publication is printed on 70 reprocessed paper ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for NP6251

Canon IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5051 User Manual preview
IMAGERUNNER ADVANCE C5051
Brand: Canon Pages: 152
Olivetti DF-670 Service Manual preview
DF-670
Brand: Olivetti Pages: 54
Xerox DocuColor DocuColor 4 Administrator'S Manual preview
DocuColor DocuColor 4
Brand: Xerox Pages: 166
Panasonic DP-1515P Operating Instructions Manual preview
DP-1515P
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 36
Panasonic DA-DS150 Setup Procedure preview
DA-DS150
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 41
Panasonic DP-150FP Operating Instructions Manual preview
DP-150FP
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 114
Panasonic DP-135FP Operating Instructions Manual preview
DP-135FP
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 114
Panasonic 3000 Operating Instructions Manual preview
3000
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 138
Panasonic 403171 Operating Instructions Manual preview
403171
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 161
Panasonic DA-FS700 Operating Instructions Manual preview
DA-FS700
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 271
Minolta Di150f User Manual preview
Di150f
Brand: Minolta Pages: 167
Oce cm4010 Facsimile Manual preview
cm4010
Brand: Oce Pages: 190
Xerox 2006NPC - DocuColor Color Laser Manual preview
2006NPC - DocuColor Color Laser
Brand: Xerox Pages: 26
Lanier 5415 Operator'S Manual preview
5415
Brand: Lanier Pages: 104
Xerox 2006NPC - DocuColor Color Laser User Manual preview
2006NPC - DocuColor Color Laser
Brand: Xerox Pages: 574

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands